Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Subaru Impreza Owner Manual 2014
Subaru Impreza Owner Manual 2014
Subaru Impreza Owner Manual 2014
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
*
C Copyright 2014 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Vehicle types
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) 4-door models
2) 5-door models except XV CROSSTREK
3) XV CROSSTREK models
Warranties & Models with HID headlights How to use this Owner’s 0
Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. CAUTION
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the lights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove read this manual. To protect yourself and
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle,
warranties: HID headlights before vehicle dis-
posal. Once removed, please reuse, follow the instructions in this manual.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- Failure to observe these instructions may
. Emission Control Systems Warranty lights as hazardous waste. result in serious injury and damage to your
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with protect the child from injury in a
driving considerable speed and force. collision, because the child will
Occupants who are out of proper be caught between the passen-
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag ger and objects inside the vehi-
deploys could suffer very serious cle.
injuries. Because the SRS airbag . While riding in the vehicle, in-
WARNING
needs enough space for deploy- fants and small children should
. All persons in the vehicle should ment, the driver should always always be placed in the REAR
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE sit upright and well back in the seat in an infant or child restraint
the vehicle starts to move. Other- seat as far from the steering system which is appropriate for
wise, the possibility of serious wheel as practical while still the child’s age, height and
injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control weight. If a child is too big for a
event of a sudden stop or acci- and the front passenger should child restraint system, the child
dent. move the seat as far back as should sit in the REAR seat and
possible and sit upright and well be restrained using the seatbelts.
. To obtain maximum protection in
back in the seat. According to accident statistics,
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the children are safer when properly
For instructions and precautions, carefully restrained in the rear seating
vehicle should always wear seat- read the following sections.
belts when the vehicle is moving. positions than in the front seat-
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- ing positions. Never allow a child
System) airbag does not do away belts” F1-11. to stand up or kneel on the seat.
with the need to fasten seatbelts. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to . Put children aged 12 and under in
In combination with the seat- “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint the REAR seat properly re-
belts, it offers the best combined System airbag)” F1-37. strained at all times in a child
protection in case of a serious restraint device or in a seatbelt.
accident. & Child safety The SRS airbag deploys with
Not wearing a seatbelt increases considerable speed and force
the chance of severe injury or WARNING and can injure or even kill chil-
death in a crash even when the dren, especially if they are 12
. Never hold a child on your lap or years of age and under and are
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
in your arms while the vehicle is not restrained or improperly re-
moving. The passenger cannot strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, could quickly become high en- & Engine exhaust gas (carbon 0
their risk of being injured from ough to cause severe or possibly monoxide)
deployment is greater. fatal injuries to them.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD . Help prevent children, adults or WARNING
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE animals from locking themselves
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS in the trunk. On hot or sunny . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO days, the temperature in the Engine exhaust gas contains
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE trunk could quickly become high carbon monoxide, a colorless
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO enough to cause death or serious and odorless gas which is dan-
THE SRS AIRBAG. heat-related injuries including gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always turn the child safety locks brain damage to anyone locked . Always properly maintain the en-
to the “LOCK” position when inside, particularly for small chil- gine exhaust system to prevent
children sit in the rear seat. dren. engine exhaust gas from enter-
Serious injury could result if a . When leaving the vehicle, close ing the vehicle.
child accidentally opens the door all windows and lock all doors. . Never run the engine in a closed
and falls out. Refer to “Child Also make certain that the trunk space, such as a garage, except
safety locks” F2-15. is closed. for the brief time needed to drive
. Always lock the passenger’s win- the vehicle in or out of it.
dows using the lock switch when For instructions and precautions, carefully . Avoid remaining in a parked
children are riding in the vehicle. read the following sections. vehicle for a lengthy time while
Failure to follow this procedure . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- the engine is running. If that is
could result in injury to a child belts” F1-11. unavoidable, then use the venti-
operating the power window. Re- . For the child restraint system, refer to lation fan to force fresh air into
fer to “Windows” F2-16. “Child restraint systems” F1-24. the vehicle.
. Never leave unattended children, . For the SRS airbag system, refer to . Always keep the front ventilator
adults or animals in the vehicle. “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint inlet grille free from snow, leaves
They could accidentally injure System airbag)” F1-37. or other obstructions to ensure
themselves or others through that the ventilation system al-
inadvertent operation of the ve- ways works properly.
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, . If at any time you suspect that
temperature in a closed vehicle exhaust fumes are entering the
– CONTINUED –
vehicle, have t he probl em hol affects all people differently, you may your doctor.
checked and corrected as soon have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your Never drive if you are under the influence
as possible. If you must drive
blood is below the legal limit. The safest of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
under these conditions, drive
thing you can do is never drink and drive. own health and well-being, we urge you
only with all windows fully open.
However if you have no choice but to not to take illegal drugs in the first place
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate and to seek treatment if you are addicted
closed while driving to prevent drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
tely before getting behind the wheel. to those drugs.
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
& Drinking and driving WARNING
There are some drugs (over the When you are tired or sleepy, your
WARNING counter and prescription) that can reaction time will be delayed and
delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at-
Drinking and then driving is very tentiveness will be impaired. If you
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking drive when tired or sleepy, your,
stream delays your reaction time your passengers’ and other per-
and impairs your perception, judg- them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk sons’ chances of being involved in
ment and attentiveness. If you drive a serious accident may increase.
after drinking – even if you drink just of being involved in a serious or
a little – it will increase the risk of fatal accident.
Please do not continue to drive but
being involved in a serious or fatal instead find a safe place to rest if you
accident, injuring or killing yourself, If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
your passengers and others. In should make periodic rest stops to refresh
addition, if you are injured in the literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can yourself before continuing on your journey.
accident, alcohol may increase the When possible, you should share the
severity of that injury. impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can driving with others.
Please don’t drink and drive. make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
Drunken driving is one of the most you have a medical condition that requires
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- you to take drugs, please consult with
& Modification of your vehicle & Driving vehicles equipped handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
0
with navigation system in the front passenger’s seat. For further
CAUTION information, consult your veterinarian,
WARNING local animal protection society or pet
Your vehicle should not be modified shop.
other than with genuine SUBARU Do not allow the monitor to distract
parts and accessories. Other types your attention from driving. Also, do & Tire pressures
of modifications could affect its not operate the controls of the Check and, if necessary, adjust the
performance, safety or durability, navigation system while driving. pressure of each tire (including the spare)
and may even violate governmental The loss of attention to driving at least once a month and before any long
regulations. In addition, damage or could lead to an accident. If you journey.
performance problems resulting wish to operate the controls of the
from modification may not be cov- navigation system, first take the Check the tire pressure when the tires are
ered under warranties. vehicle off the road and stop it in a cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
safe place. tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
& Car phone/cell phone and to “Tires and wheels” F11-21.
driving & Driving with pets
WARNING
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
CAUTION driving and distract your attention from Driving at high speeds with exces-
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, sively low tire pressures can cause
Do not use a car phone/cell phone unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown the tires to deform severely and to
while driving; it may distract your around inside the vehicle and hurt you or rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
attention from driving and can lead your passengers. Besides, the pets can crease in temperature could cause
to an accident. If you use a car be hurt under these situations. It is also for tread separation, and destruction of
phone/cell phone, pull off the road their own safety that pets should be the tires. The resulting loss of
and park in a safe place before properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- vehicle control could lead to an
using your phone. In some States/ strain a pet with a special traveling accident.
Provinces, only hands-free phones harness which can be secured to the rear
may legally be used while driving. seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
General information & Noise from under the vehicle depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
NOTE
& California proposition 65 . How fast the vehicle was traveling.
You may hear a noise from under the
warning vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours These data can help provide a better
after the ignition switch is turned to the understanding of the circumstances in
WARNING “LOCK” (off) position. However, this which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
Engine exhaust, some of its consti- does not indicate a malfunction. This EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
tuents, and certain vehicle compo- noise is caused by the operation of the only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
nents contain or emit chemicals fuel evaporation leakage checking sys- no data are recorded by the EDR under
known to the State of California to tem and is normal. The noise will stop normal driving conditions and no personal
cause cancer and birth defects or after approximately 15 minutes. data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
other reproductive harm. In addi- location) are recorded. However, other
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and & Event data recorder parties, such as law enforcement, could
certain components of product wear combine the EDR data with the type of
This vehicle is equipped with an event personally identifying data routinely ac-
contain or emit chemicals known to data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
the State of California to cause quired during a crash investigation.
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
cancer and birth defects or other near crash-like situations, such as an To read data recorded by an EDR, special
reproductive harm. airbag deployment or hitting a road ob- equipment is required, and access to the
stacle, data that will assist in understand- vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
& California Perchlorate Advi- The EDR is designed to record data such as law enforcement, that have the
sory related to vehicle dynamics and safety special equipment, can read the informa-
Certain vehicle components such as air- systems for a short period of time, typically tion if they have access to the vehicle or
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this the EDR.
keyless entry transmitter batteries may vehicle is designed to record such data
contain perchlorate material. Special as:
handling may apply for service or vehicle . How various systems in your vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ were operating;
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. . Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
Table of contents
10
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Wiper switch (page 3-77)
3) Headlight switch (page 3-71)
& Exterior 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-37)
5) Moonroof (page 2-23)
6) Roof rails (page 8-14)
7) Outside mirror (page 3-86)
8) Door locks (page 2-4)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
10) Flat tires (page 9-6)
11) Snow tires (page 8-10)
12) Fog light switch (page 3-75)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
14) Towing hook (page 9-14)
11
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-88)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 2-15)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-14)
5) Trunk lid (page 2-19)
6) Rear gate (page 2-21)
7) Towing hook (page 9-14)
– CONTINUED –
12
13
1) Power windows (page 2-16)
2) Door locks (page 2-4) 0
3) Outside mirror switch (page 3-86)
4) Glove box (page 6-5)
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
6) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-17)/Select lever
(CVT) (page 7-19)
7) Parking brake lever (page 7-34)
8) Cup holder (page 6-6)
9) Center console (page 6-5)
– CONTINUED –
14
15
– CONTINUED –
16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-75)
2) Mist (page 3-77)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-77)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-78)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-77)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-77)
7) Light control switch (page 3-71)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-75)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-71)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-72)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-73)
17
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –
18
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
19
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page 0
Mark Name Page AT OIL TEMP warning 3-15 High beam indicator 3-22
light (CVT models) light
Seatbelt warning light 3-9 Automatic headlight
ABS warning light 3-16 beam leveler warning 3-22
light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s 3-9
seatbelt warning light Brake system warning 3-17 Front fog light indicator 3-22
light light (if equipped)
SRS airbag system 3-11
warning light Door open warning
light 3-18 Security indicator light 3-21
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag ON indi- 3-11
cator AWD warning light 3-18 Headlight indicator
(CVT models) light (if equipped) 3-22
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag OFF in- 3-11
dicator Power steering warn- 3-19 Cruise control indica-
ing light tor light (if equipped) 3-22
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc- 3-12 Hill start assist warn- Cruise control set in-
tion indicator light ing light/Hill start assist 3-18 dicator light (if 3-22
OFF indicator light equipped)
Coolant temperature
low indicator light/ 3-13 Vehicle Dynamics
Coolant temperature Control warning light/ Low fuel warning light 3-18
high warning light Vehicle Dynamics 3-19
Control operation indi-
cator light Low tire pressure
Charge warning light 3-14 warning light 3-15
Vehicle Dynamics (U.S.-spec. models)
Control OFF indicator 3-20
Oil pressure warning 3-14 light Windshield washer
light 3-14
fluid warning light
Turn signal indicator 3-22
Engine oil level warn- lights
3-14
ing light
20
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions
can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Multi function display” F3-28.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds
Impact sensor operation (only models with shock Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Dome light and map lights illumination (models with ON/OFF OFF
moonroof)
Dome light illumination (models without moonroof)
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Defogger and deicer system for models Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15
with the automatic climate control system windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation minutes
Dome light Operation of dome light/map light OFF delay timer OFF/10S/20S/30S 30S
Map light for models with a moonroof
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off headlights Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then To prevent the passenger from slid- 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
release the lever and make sure the is lowered.
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
seatback is securely locked into place. 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
a collision, always put the seatback rises.
The seatback placed in a reclined position in the upright position while the
can spring back upward with force when vehicle is in motion. Also, do not The height of the seat can be adjusted by
the lever is pulled. While operating the place objects such as cushions moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
lever to return the seatback, hold the between the passenger and the up and down.
seatback lightly so that it may be raised seatback. If you do so, the risk of
back gradually. sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
& Head restraint adjustment ! Head restraint height adjustment are located on the top of the seatback until
1
the head restraint locks.
WARNING ! Head restraint angle adjustment
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from func-
tioning as intended. Therefore,
when you remove the head re- 1) Head restraint
straints, you must reinstall all 2) Release button
head restraints correctly to pro-
tect vehicle occupants. Each head restraint should be adjusted so The angle of the head restraint can be
that the center of the head restraint is adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
. All occupants, including the dri- closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
ver, should not operate a vehicle head restraint to a position where the back
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the To raise: of your head is as close to the head
head restraints are placed in their Pull the head restraint up. restraint as possible.
proper positions in order to mini- To lower:
mize the risk of neck injury in the To tilt:
Push the head restraint down while
event of a crash. Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback. preferred position. A click will be audible
The head restraints for the driver’s seat when the head restraint is locked.
and front passenger’s seat are adjustable To remove:
To return:
in the following ways. While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint. Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint will
To install:
automatically return to the fully upright
Install the head restraint into the holes that position. Then, adjust the head restraint
– CONTINUED –
again to the preferred angle. Seat heater (if equipped) & Operation
– CONTINUED –
& Armrest (if equipped) & Head restraint adjustment ! Rear windows side seating position
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you have removed the head re-
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge straints, you must reinstall all 1) Head restraint
of the armrest. head restraints to protect vehicle 2) Release button
occupants.
To remove:
WARNING . All occupants, including the dri-
While pressing the release button, pull out
ver, should not operate a vehicle
To avoid serious injury, passengers the head restraint.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
must never be allowed to sit on the head restraints are placed in their To install:
center armrest while the vehicle is in proper positions in order to mini- Install the head restraint into the holes that
motion. mize the risk of neck injury in the are located on the top of the seatback until
event of a crash. the head restraint locks.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, check that the
unlocking marker on the lock re-
lease knob is not visible. Also,
shake the seatback slightly to con-
firm that it is securely fixed in place.
If the seatback is not securely fixed
in place, the seatback may suddenly
fold down in the event of sudden
braking, or objects may move out
from the cargo area or trunk, which
could cause serious injury or death. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock
WARNING release knob and then fold the seatback
down.
When the seatback is returned to its
To return the seatback to its original
original position, observe the follow-
position, raise the seatback until it locks
ing precautions. Failure to do so
into place and make sure that it is securely
may lead to serious injury or an
locked referring to the following descrip-
accident because the operation effi-
tion.
ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. The seatbelt should not pass
behind the securing hook for
the seatback.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to & Emergency Locking Retrac- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
securely place the lap belt as low as tor (ELR)
possible on the hips and not on the child’s When the child restraint system is re-
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency moved, make sure that the seatbelt
cannot be properly positioned, a child Locking Retractor (ELR). retracts fully and the retractor returned to
restraint system should be used. Never The emergency locking retractor allows the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
place the shoulder belt under the child’s normal body movement but the retractor mode.
arm or behind the child’s back. locks automatically during a sudden stop, For instructions on how to convert the
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
! Expectant mothers out of the retractor. the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt”
& Automatic/Emergency Lock- F1-27.
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ and chime
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
Retractor normally functions as an Emer- chime” F3-9.
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an additional locking mode & Fastening the seatbelt
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint WARNING
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
Expectant mothers also need to use the
out completely and is then retracted even . Never use a belt that is twisted or
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in reversed. In an accident, this can
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
that position and the seatbelt cannot be increase the risk or severity of
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks injury.
should be worn securely and as low as
will be heard which indicate the retractor
possible over the hips, not over the waist. . Keep the lap belt as low as
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
possible on your hips. In a colli-
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
sion, this spreads the force of the
When securing a child restraint system on lap belt over stronger hip bones
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, instead of across the weaker
the seatbelt must be changed over to the abdomen.
– CONTINUED –
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle ! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING
until you hear a click. belt anchor height
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on The shoulder belt anchor height should be
the shoulder belt. adjusted to the position best suited for the
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
on your hips, not on your waist. anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor Push the button on the buckle.
down.
Before closing the door, make sure that
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid
it is locked in place. catching the belt webbing in the door.
– CONTINUED –
1. Raise the head restraint to the ex- 3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it 4. After confirming that the webbing is not
tended position. Do not remove the head through the belt guide as follows: First twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
restraint. insert one edge of the belt into the open attached at the webbing end into the
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of buckle on the right-hand side until a click
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits is heard.
inside.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate 1. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
into the center seatbelt buckle marked pointed object into the slot in the con-
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it nector (buckle) on the right-hand side and
clicks. push it in. The connector (tongue) plate
Push the release button of the center will then disconnect from the buckle.
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
. Do not allow the retractor to roll oils, chemicals and particularly
up the seatbelt too quickly. battery acid.
Otherwise, the metal tongue . Never attempt to make modifica-
plates may hit against the trim, tions or changes that will prevent
resulting in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop-
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. damage to the trim.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)
into the belt holder.
– CONTINUED –
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant passenger
and lap belt pretensioners more effectively. – SRS frontal airbag for driver
– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
NOTE When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
senger*
This section is applicable to the front an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released. – SRS side airbags (both sides) (if
passenger’s seatbelt in XV CROSS- an offset frontal collision occurs)
TREK models. These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a – SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
fire in the vehicle. (if an offset frontal collision occurs)
*: This does not operate if the occupant
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been detection system deactivates airbag op-
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re- eration. For details, refer to “Front
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-46.
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
. In cases of side collisions, the
therefore must be replaced.
following components will operate si-
NOTE multaneously.
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- – SRS curtain airbag (impacted
signed to activate in minor impacts or side)
in rear impacts. – SRS side airbag (impacted side)
. When a rollover accident occurs, the (when any of the center pillar im-
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder lap belt pretensioner does not activate; pact sensors/front door impact sen-
belt pretensioner) however, as the curtain airbags deploy, sors sense an impact force)
2) Lap belt pretensioner the shoulder belt pretensioner is acti- – Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
vated. At this time, the driver’s side (when the driver’s side front door
On the front passenger’s side in XV
seatbelt pretensioner and passenger’s impact sensor sense an impact
CROSSTREK models, the shoulder belt
side shoulder belt pretensioner acti- force)
pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt
pretensioner, which is located at the base vate simultaneously. – Seatbelt pretensioner for front
of the center pillar. Like the shoulder belt . In cases of frontal collisions, the passenger (shoulder belt preten-
pretensioner, the lap belt pretensioner following components will operate si- sioner only) (when the front pas-
instantaneously pulls in the belt to elim- multaneously. senger’s side front door impact
inate slack if a certain level of frontal – Seatbelt pretensioner for driver sensor sense an impact force)
collision force is detected. As a result, the – Seatbelt pretensioner for front . Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the This could result in accidental & System servicing 1
event that a pretensioner is activated, activation of the seatbelt preten-
both the driver’s and front passenger’s sioners or could make the sys- WARNING
seatbelt retractor assemblies should tem inoperative, possibly result-
be replaced only by an authorized ing in serious injury. Seatbelt . When discarding a seatbelt re-
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- pretensioners have no user-ser- tractor assembly or scrapping
belt retractor assemblies, use only viceable parts. For required ser- the entire vehicle damaged by a
genuine SUBARU parts. vicing of front seatbelt retractors collision, consult your SUBARU
. If either front seatbelt does not equipped with seatbelt preten- dealer.
retract or cannot be pulled out due to sioners, consult your SUBARU . Tampering with or disconnecting
a malfunction or activation of the dealer. the system’s wiring could result
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU . When discarding front seatbelt in accidental activation of the
dealer as soon as possible. retractor assemblies or scrap- seatbelt pretensioner and/or
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to SRS airbag or could make the
bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other system inoperative, which may
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer reasons, consult your SUBARU result in serious injury. Do not
as soon as possible. dealer. use electrical test equipment on
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge any circuit related to the seatbelt
you to explain to the buyer that it has pretensioner and SRS airbag
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the & System monitors systems. For required servicing
buyer to the contents of this section. of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
WARNING er.
while the vehicle is being driven. The
. To obtain maximum protection, seatbelt pretensioners share the control
the occupants should sit in an module with the SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
upright position with their seat- Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
belts properly fastened. Refer to seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag The sensors and SRS airbag control
“Seatbelts” F1-11. system warning light will illuminate. For modules are located in the following
details, refer to “SRS airbag system locations.
. Do not modify, remove or strike monitors” F1-64.
the front seatbelt retractor as- . Front impact sensors: on both
semblies or surrounding area. sides of the radiator panel
– CONTINUED –
. Front door impact sensors: on & Precautions against vehicle Child restraint systems
both front doors modification
. Satellite safing sensor: under the Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
rear center seat you want to install any accessory parts to
. SRS airbag control module (in- your vehicle.
cluding the impact sensors): un-
der the center of the instrument CAUTION
panel
Do not perform any of the following
If you need service or repair in those modifications. Such modifications
areas or near the front seatbelt can interfere with proper operation
retractors, have the work performed of the seatbelt pretensioners.
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
NOTE skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
If the front or side part of the vehicle is ine SUBARU accessory parts to Infants and small children should always
damaged in an accident to the extent the front end. be placed in an infant or child restraint
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not . Modification of the suspension system in the rear seat while riding in the
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer system or front end structure. vehicle. You should use an infant or child
as soon as possible. restraint system that meets Federal Motor
. Installation of a tire of different
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
size and construction from the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
tires specified on the vehicle
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
placard attached to the driver’s
priate for the child’s age and size. All child
door pillar or specified for indivi-
restraint systems are designed to be
dual vehicle models in this Own-
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
er’s Manual.
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-32).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
WARNING
WARNING Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
Never let a passenger hold a child child to stand up, or to kneel on any
on his or her lap or in his or her seat. Unrestrained children will be
arms while the vehicle is moving. thrown forward during sudden stop
The passenger cannot protect the
– CONTINUED –
& Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys- child suffering personal injury in the 1
system tems with A/ELR seatbelt event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
! Installing a rearward facing child
. Child restraint systems and seat- restraint
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
appropriate for the child’s age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
(weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
1. Place the child restraint system in the
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- injuries or death to the child.
rear seating position.
cle Safety Standards for the United States
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
CAUTION or around the child restraint system
dards for Canada. It can be identified by
following the instructions provided by its
looking for the label on the child restraint
When you install a child restraint manufacturer.
system or the manufacturer’s statement of
system, follow the manufacturer’s 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
compliance in the document attached to
instructions supplied with it. After until you hear a click.
the system.
installing the child restraint system,
Also it is important for you to make sure check to ensure that it is held
that the child restraint system is compa- securely in position. If it is not held
tible with the vehicle in which it will be tight and secure, the danger of your
used.
– CONTINUED –
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint 8. To remove the child restraint system,
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the system forward and from side to side to press the release button on the seatbelt
retractor to change the retractor over from check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a buckle and allow the belt to retract
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) child restraint can be more firmly secured completely. The belt will return to the
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) by pushing it down into the seat cushion ELR mode.
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind and then tightening the seatbelt.
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt WARNING
clicks will be heard which indicate the to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
retractor functions as ALR. properly functioning). NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 8. Before having a child sit in the child 11. To remove the child restraint system,
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and press the release button on the seatbelt
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly buckle and allow the belt to retract
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) secured. Sometimes a child restraint completely. The belt will return to the
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) system can be more firmly secured by ELR mode.
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt. If you have installed a child restraint
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
system for the rear center seating posi-
clicks will be heard which indicate the 9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
tion on a 5-door model, when you
retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
remove the child restraint system, the
properly functioning).
seatbelt may not be restored to the ELR
10. Latch the top tether hook onto the mode even if the seatbelt is retracted. In
tether anchorage that is located behind this case, lower the head restraint to the
the rear seat and tighten the top tether retracted position to allow the seatbelt to
firmly. For additional instructions, refer to retract moreover. The seatbelt will return
“Top tether anchorages” F1-35. to the ELR mode.
Remember that the head restraint is not
intended to be used at the lowest position
(retracted position). Therefore, when the
. Never place the shoulder belt & Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
under the child’s arm or behind systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
the child’s back. If an accident tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
occurs, this can increase the risk creased.
or severity of injury to the child. WARNING
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in ! Lower and tether anchorages
order to provide full restraint. . Child restraint systems and seat-
Loose fitting belts are not as belts can become hot in a vehicle
effective in preventing or redu- that has been closed up in sunny
cing injury. weather; they could burn a small
. Place the lap belt as low as child. Check the child restraint
possible on the child’s hips. A system before you place a child
high-positioned lap belt will in- in it.
crease the risk of sliding under . Do not leave an unsecured child
the lap belt and of the lap belt restraint system in your vehicle.
sliding up over the abdomen, and Unsecured child restraint sys-
both can result in serious inter- tems can be thrown around in-
nal injury or death. side of the vehicle in a sudden
. Make sure the shoulder belt is stop, turn or accident; they can
positioned across the center of strike and injure vehicle occu- Some types of child restraint systems can
child’s shoulder. Placing the pants as well as result in serious be installed on the rear seat of your
shoulder belt over the neck may injuries or death to the child. vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
result in neck injury during sud- child restraint systems are secured to the
den braking or in a collision. designated anchorages provided on the
CAUTION vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
When you install a child restraint chorages are sometimes referred to as the
system, follow the manufacturer’s LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
instructions supplied with it. After Tethers for CHildren).
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for ! To install a child restraint system 1
installing a child restraint system only on using lower and tether an-
the rear seat window-side seating posi- chorages
tions. For each window-side seating posi-
To install a child restraint system using
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
lower and tether anchorages, perform the
Each lower anchorage is located where following procedure.
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
! Tether anchorages WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower serious injury or death could result.
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- 1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
modating such child restraint systems. that it is securely locked into place.
! Lower anchorages – It is possible to check whether the
seatback is locked visually. If the
seatback is locked into place, the red
colored unlocking marker which is
attached to the bottom of the lock
The tether anchorages (upper an- release knob is invisible. For details,
chorages) are provided at the locations refer to “Folding down the rear seat-
shown in the above illustration. For de- back” F1-9.
tails, refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-
35.
– CONTINUED –
2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of 5. [If your child restraint system is of a
the rear seat seatbacks. These marks flexible attachment type (which uses
indicate the positions of the lower an- tether belts to connect the child restraint
chorages (bars). 4. While following the instructions sup- system properly to the lower anchorages)]
plied by the child restraint system manu- While pushing the child restraint into the
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on tether belts up to secure the child restraint
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the system firmly by taking up the slack in the
hooks are connected, make sure the belt.
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. 6. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind
the rear seat and tighten the top tether
firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
“Top tether anchorages” F1-35.
– CONTINUED –
Three upper anchorages are installed on ! 5-door models Three upper anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat. the back side of the rear seatback.
! To hook the top tether
CAUTION
. Except for the center seating
position on 5-door models, re-
move the head restraint when
mounting a child restraint sys-
tem. Otherwise, it might be pos-
sible that the top tether cannot be
fastened tightly.
. For the center seating position on
5-door models, raise the center
head restraint to the extended
position when mounting a child
restraint system. Otherwise, it
will be impossible to use the
seatbelt guide that is attached
to the head restraint correctly.
The seatbelt guide is essential
for routing the belt webbing at
the center seating position. For
information about using the seat-
belt guide, refer to “Rear center
1) For left seat seatbelt on 5-door models” F1-
2) For center seat 16.
3) For right seat
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-37
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& General precautions regard- to help avoid injuries that can and the front passenger should
ing SRS airbag system result when an occupant is not move the seat as far back as
seated in a proper upright posi- possible and sit upright and well
WARNING tion. back in the seat.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-39
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-41
WARNING WARNING
and can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of age
1
Do not hang coat hangers or other Do not put any kind of cover or and under and are not restrained or
hard or pointed objects on the coat clothes or other objects over either improperly restrained. Because chil-
hooks. If such items were hanging front seatback and do not attach dren are lighter and weaker than
on the coat hooks during deploy- labels or stickers to the front seat adults, their risk of being injured
ment of the SRS curtain airbags, surface on or near the SRS side from deployment is greater.
they could cause serious injuries by airbag. They could prevent proper For that reason, we strongly recom-
coming off the coat hooks and being deployment of the SRS side airbag, mend that ALL children (including
thrown through the cabin or by reducing protection available to the those in child seats and those that
preventing deployment of the cur- front seat’s occupant. have outgrown child restraint de-
tain airbags. vices) sit in the REAR seat properly
Before hanging clothing on the coat restrained at all times in a child
hooks, make sure there are no sharp restraint device or in a seatbelt,
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth- whichever is appropriate for the
ing directly on the coat hooks with- child’s age, height and weight.
out using hangers. Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
WARNING For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
Put children aged 12 and under in tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
the rear seat properly restrained at tems” F1-24.
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
– CONTINUED –
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43
seat facing the side window blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
1
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback . A deploying SRS airbag releases
– Put his/her head, arms or hot gas. Occupants could get
other parts of the body out of burned if they come into direct
the window contact with the hot gas.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or NOTE
SRS curtain airbag deployment . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
could injure the child seriously you to explain to the buyer that it is
because his/her head, arms or equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
other parts of the body are too the buyer to the applicable section in
close to the SRS side airbag and/ this Owner’s Manual.
or SRS curtain airbag. . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
. Since your vehicle is also supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
equipped with a front passen- of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children details about restarting of the engine,
aged 12 and under should be refer to “If your vehicle is involved in
placed in the rear seat anyway an accident” F9-18.
and should be properly re-
strained at all times.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
WARNING some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
. Never allow a child to do the ing problems for people with a
following. history of asthma or other
– Kneel on any passenger’s breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
– CONTINUED –
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-45
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s 1
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side in XV CROSSTREK models)
1) Airbag control module (including impact 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
sensor [all models] and rollover sensor 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
[XV CROSSTREK models]) side)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side)
side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) 10) Airbag wiring
– CONTINUED –
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-47
or cause the system to fail. may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
the seat immediately, let the seat dry
naturally and then check the SRS airbag
1
. Do not apply any strong impact
to the front passenger’s seat. Have your vehicle inspected at your system warning light as follows.
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front . If the SRS airbag system warning light
. Do not spill liquid on the front passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle illuminates, keep the seat dry until the
passenger’s seat. If liquid is to your SUBARU dealer. warning light turns off. If the SRS airbag
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
system warning light stays on even when
. Do not remove or disassemble NOTE the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to
the front passenger’s seat. The front passenger’s SRS side airbag sit on the front passenger’s seat and have
. Do not install any accessory and SRS curtain airbag are not con- the system checked by your SUBARU
(such as an audio amplifier) other trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron- dealer.
than a genuine SUBARU acces- tal airbag system. . If the SRS airbag system warning light
sory under the front passenger’s ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and does not illuminate, check that the front
seat. OFF indicators passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
. Do not place anything (shoes, indicators work properly. If the indicators
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag do not work properly, do not allow anyone
umbrella, etc.) under the front ON and OFF indicators” F3-11.
passenger’s seat. to sit on the front passenger’s seat and
! Occupant detection system have the system checked by your
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
The occupant detection system sensor is SUBARU dealer.
seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery. installed under the seat upholstery and Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
monitors the physique and posture of the placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
. Do not place a magnet near the
front passenger. Using this information, may adversely affect the ability of the
seatbelt buckle.
the occupant detection system determines system to determine deployment. This
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
airbag should be deployed or not. airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system If the front passenger’s seat cushion is ing properly. Check that the indicators
warning light will illuminate. Have the wet, this may adversely affect the ability of work properly.
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- the system to determine deployment. If When the OFF indicator turns off and the
er immediately if the SRS airbag system the seat cushion is wet, the front passen- ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-
warning light illuminates. ger should stop sitting on the front ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from collision. Remove luggage and electronic
devices from the front passenger’s seat.
– CONTINUED –
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-49
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District <Canada>
system to complete self-checking. Follow- of Columbia> Subaru Canada, Inc.
ing the system check, both indicators turn Subaru of America, Inc. Consumer Support Department
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator Customer Dealer Services Department 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
should illuminate while the OFF indicator P.O. Box 6000 L5R 4J7
remains off. 1-800-894-4212
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi- 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783) There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
nated while the ON indicator remains off, tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat <Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii in such an area, please contact the
and immediately contact your SUBARU SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
dealer for an inspection. 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, you bought your vehicle.
! How to contact the vehicle manu- Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
facturer concerning modifications 808-839-2273
for persons with disabilities that <Guam>
may affect the advanced airbag
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
system
bile
Changing or moving any parts of the front 491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, Dededo, Guam 96921-6255
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
671-633-2698
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
steering column, tire, suspension or floor <Puerto Rico>
panel can affect the operation of the Trebol Motors
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
you have any questions, you may contact 00910
the following SUBARU distributors.
787-793-2828
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-51
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
– CONTINUED –
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. itself.
The two inflators of each airbag are Do not touch the SRS airbag system
triggered either sequentially or simulta- ! Example of accident in which the
components around the steering driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
neously, depending on the severity of wheel and dashboard with bare
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
hands right after deployment. Doing will most likely deploy
frontal airbag and depending on the so can cause burns because the
severity of impact and the characteristic components can be very hot as a
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case result of deployment.
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s signed to deploy in the event of an
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s accident involving a moderate to severe
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is frontal collision. They are not designed to
not impaired. The time required from deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
detecting impact to the deflation of the because the necessary protection can be
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
than the blink of an eye. are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal because deployment of only the driver’s A head-on collision against a thick con-
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt would not help the occupant in those only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
pretensioners operate at the same time. situations. The driver’s and front passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, function on a one-time-only basis. vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and frontal impact similar in fashion and
some smoke will be released. These SRS airbag deployment depends on the magnitude to the collision described
occurrences are a normal result of the level of force experienced in the passen- above.
deployment. This smoke does not indicate ger compartment during a collision. That
a fire in the vehicle. level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-53
! Examples of the types of acci- Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
1
dents in which it is possible that both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
the driver’s/driver’s and front frontal airbags may be activated when the
passenger’s SRS frontal vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
airbag(s) will deploy undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
– CONTINUED –
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-55
! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are designed not to deploy be activated on the second impact.
1
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
& SRS side airbag and SRS
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS curtain airbag
frontal airbag(s) are not de- side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
signed to deploy in most cases speed frontal collision. The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is In a moderate to severe side impact
impacted more than once, the driver’s collision, the SRS side airbag on the
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first between the occupant and the door panel
impact. and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
Example: In the case of a double collision, waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
first with another vehicle, then against a for front seat occupants.
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are the cabin is stored in the roof side
activated on the first impact, it/they will not (between the front pillar and a point over
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
– CONTINUED –
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
located at the top of each center pillar. SRS curtain airbag deploys independently module causes only the SRS curtain
In a moderate to severe side impact of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For XV CROSSTREK models, if the roll-
impacted side of the vehicle deploys over sensor detects rollover of the vehicle,
between the occupant and the side An impact sensor, which senses impact the control module inflates the SRS
window and supplements the seatbelt by force, is located in each of the following curtain airbags on both sides. At this time,
reducing the impact on the occupant’s locations. the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
head.
. In the left and right front doors pretensioners also operate at the same
For XV CROSSTREK models, in a roll- time.
over, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of . In the left and right center pillars
the vehicle deploy between the occupant . In the left and right rear wheel houses After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
and the side window and supplement the . Under the rear center seat immediately starts to deflate. The time
seatbelt by reducing the impact to the required from detection of an impact to
For XV CROSSTREK models, a rollover deflation of an SRS side airbag after
occupant’s head. sensor is also located inside the airbag deployment is shorter than the blink of
In a frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags control module. an eye.
on both sides of the vehicle deploy
If the impact sensor that is located under The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
between the occupant and the side the rear center seat and one of the center
window and supplement the seatbelt by for a while following deployment then
pillar impact sensors or front door impact slowly deflates.
reducing the impact to the occupant’s sensors together sense an impact force
head. above a predetermined level in a side The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
! Operation collision, the control module causes both airbag deploy even when no one occupies
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on the seat on the side on which an impact is
airbag can function only when the ignition the impacted side to inflate regardless of applied.
switch is in the “ON” position. whether the rear wheel house impact
sensor on the same side senses an When the SRS side airbag and SRS
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS impact. curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
side airbags and SRS curtain airbags inflation noise will be heard and some
deploy independently of each other since If the impact sensor that is located under smoke will be released. These occur-
each has its own impact sensor. There- the rear center seat and one of the rear rences are a normal result of the deploy-
fore, they may not both deploy in the same wheel house impact sensors together ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and sense an impact force above a predeter- in the vehicle.
mined level in a side collision, the control
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-57
CAUTION For XV CROSSTREK models, the SRS ! Example of the type of accident 1
curtain airbags are also designed to in which the SRS side airbag will
Do not touch the SRS side airbag deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely most likely deploy.
system components around the inclined state such as during a rollover.
front seat seatback with bare hands They are not designed to deploy in most
right after deployment. Doing so can lesser inclined state.
cause burns because the compo- Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
nents can be very hot as a result of airbag are designed to function on a one-
deployment. time-only basis.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
system (from the front pillar to the deployment depend on the level of force
part of the roof side over the rear experienced in the passenger compart-
seat). Doing so can cause burns ment during a side impact collision. That
because the components can be level differs from one type of collision to
very hot as a result of deployment. another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle 1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain itself.
airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
severe side impact collision. They are not
designed to deploy in most lesser side
impact. Also, they are not designed to
deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts
because SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deployment would not help
the occupant in those situations.
– CONTINUED –
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-59
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
XV CROSSTREK models
impact near the front seat or the rear 1
seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (XV CROSSTREK models). 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-61
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact. 1
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
unlikely to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
Except XV CROSSTREK models the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-63
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
XV CROSSTREK models
side-on impact. 1
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of acci- 2) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated
dents in which the SRS side In the event of accidents like those on the second.
airbag and SRS curtain airbag illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
are not designed to deploy in curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
most cases in most cases.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-65
– Left-hand side . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Illumination of the warning light
. Airbag control module (including im- ger’s side) while driving
1
pact sensor [all models] and rollover . Front passenger’s occupant detection
sensor [XV CROSSTREK models]) system sensor
. Frontal airbag module . Front passenger’s occupant detection & SRS airbag system servicing
– Driver’s side control module
– Front passenger’s side . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON WARNING
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator
. When discarding an airbag mod-
. Side airbag sensor . All related wiring
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
– Center pillar right-hand side cle damaged by a collision, con-
– Center pillar left-hand side WARNING
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. Front door impact sensor If the warning light exhibits any of . The SRS airbag has no user-
– Right-hand side the following conditions, there may serviceable parts. Do not use
– Left-hand side be a malfunction in the seatbelt electrical test equipment on any
. Side airbag module pretensioners and/or SRS airbag circuit related to the SRS airbag
– Driver’s side system. Immediately take your vehi- system. For required servicing of
– Front passenger’s side cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer the SRS airbag, consult your
. Curtain airbag sensor to have the system checked. Unless nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
– Rear wheel house right-hand side checked and properly repaired, the ing with or disconnecting the
– Rear wheel house left-hand side seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS system’s wiring could result in
. Curtain airbag module airbag will not operate properly in accidental inflation of the SRS
– Right-hand side the event of a collision, which may airbag or could make the system
– Left-hand side increase the risk of injury. inoperative, which may result in
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear . Flashing or flickering of the warn- serious injury.
center seat) ing light
. Seatbelt pretensioner . No illumination of the warning CAUTION
– Driver’s side light when the ignition switch is
– Front passenger’s side first turned to the “ON” position If you need service or repair in areas
. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen- . Continuous illumination of the indicated in the following list, have
ger’s side in XV CROSSTREK models) warning light the work performed by an author-
– CONTINUED –
1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- replaced, use only genuine SUBARU & Precautions against vehicle
bag control module, impact sensors parts. modification
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas. NOTE
WARNING
. Under the center console In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. To avoid accidental activation of the
. On both the right and left sides at . The front part of the vehicle was system or rendering the system
the front of the vehicle involved in an accident in which only inoperative, which may result in
. Steering wheel and column and the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both serious injury, no modifications
nearby areas driver’s and front passenger’s SRS should be made to any components
. Bottom of the steering column frontal airbags did not deploy. or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
and nearby areas . The pad of the steering wheel, the This includes following modifica-
. Top of the dashboard on front cover over the front passenger’s SRS tions.
passenger’s side and nearby frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear . Installation of custom steering
areas wheels
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
. Each front seat and nearby area wise damaged. . Attachment of additional trim
. Inside each center pillar . The center pillar, front door, rear materials to the dashboard
. Inside each front door wheel house or rear sub frame, or an . Installation of custom seats
area near these parts, was involved in
. In each roof side (from the front . Replacement of seat fabric or
an accident in which the SRS side
pillar to a point over the rear seat) leather
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
. Between the rear seat cushion deploy. . Installation of additional fabric or
and rear wheel house on each . The fabric or leather of either front leather on the front seat
side seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
. Under the rear center seat damaged. crophone or any other accessory
. The rear part of the vehicle was to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
In the event that the SRS airbag is involved in an accident in which no rear pillar, the windshield, a side
deployed, replacement of the system SRS airbag was deployed. window, an assist grip, or any
should be performed only by an author- other cabin surface that would be
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- near a deploying SRS curtain
nents of the SRS airbag system are airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-67
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (3,1)
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot. One key that has already been registered ence, and (2) this device must accept
. Do not get the key wet. If the key is required in order to register a new key. any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still operation. 2
immediately. remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
immobilizer system. For security reasons, ! Canada-spec. models
the lost key’s ID code should be erased NOTE
NOTE from the memory. To erase the lost key’s
To protect your vehicle from theft, Operation is subject to the following
ID code, all keys that will be used are two conditions: (1) this device may not
please pay close attention to the fol- required.
lowing security precautions: cause interference, and (2) this device
. Never leave your vehicle unattended For details about new key registration and must accept any interference, includ-
with its keys inside. erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact ing interference that may cause unde-
your SUBARU dealer. sired operation of the device.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and the moonroof, and lock
the doors and rear gate. & Certification for immobilizer NOTE
. Do not leave spare keys or any system L’utilisation de ce dispositif est auto-
record of your key number in the risée seulement aux deux conditions
vehicle. ! U.S.-spec. models suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispo-
type immobilizer system. sitif doit être prêt à accepter tout
CAUTION brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même
si ce brouillage est susceptible de
& Security indicator light FCC WARNING compromettre le fonctionnement du
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-21. Changes or modifications not ex- dispositif.
pressly approved by the party re-
& Key replacement sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
Your key number plate will be required if
equipment.
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
This device complies with part 15 of the
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
before it can be used. Up to four keys
following two conditions: (1) This de-
can be registered for use with one vehicle.
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key and open the door while the alarm
system is armed, the alarm system is
triggered and the vehicle’s horn
sounds. In this case, perform any of
the following operations.
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter. To lock the driver’s door from the outside Locking using lock lever
. Insert the key into the ignition with the key, turn the key toward the front. 1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
switch and turn the ignition switch to To unlock the door, turn the key toward the 2) Close the door.
the “ON” position. rear. Pull the outside door handle to open
an unlocked door.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-10. To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
– CONTINUED –
& Unlocking the doors & Vehicle finder function & Selecting audible signal op-
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock Use this function to find your vehicle eration
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will parked among many vehicles in a large Using an electronic chirp, the system will 2
sound twice and the hazard warning parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet give you an audible signal when the doors
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
doors and the rear gate (5-door), briefly lock/arm button three times in a 5-second the audible signal off.
press the unlock/disarm button a second period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
time within 5 seconds. Perform the following steps to deactivate
sound once and its hazard warning
the audible signal. You can also use the
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE same steps to restore the function.
If the interval between the first and NOTE 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
second presses of the unlock/disarm If the interval between presses is too doors and the rear gate.
button (for unlocking of all of the doors short when you press the lock/arm
and the rear gate) is extremely short, button three times, the system may
the system may not respond. not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
& Opening the trunk lid/un-
locking rear gate & Sounding a panic alarm
! 4-door models To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The trunk lid opens when the trunk lid
opener button is pressed and held for at The horn will sound and the hazard
least 2 seconds. An electronic chirp will warning flashers will flash.
sound twice and the hazard warning To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
flashers will flash twice. button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
button on the remote transmitter is 2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
! 5-door models pressed, the alarm will be deactivated of the power door locking switch.
Pressing the rear gate unlock button after approximately 30 seconds. 3. While holding down the REAR (UN-
unlocks the rear gate. LOCK) side of the power door locking
An electronic chirp will sound twice and switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into
the hazard warning flashers will flash the ignition switch at least 6 times within
twice. 10 seconds after Step 2.
– CONTINUED –
4. Open and close the driver’s door once FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the Alarm system
within 10 seconds after Step 3. following two conditions: (1) This de-
5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3 vice may not cause harmful interfer- & General information
times to indicate completion of the setting. ence, and (2) this device must accept
The alarm system helps to protect your
any interference received, including
You may have the above settings done by vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
interference that may cause undesired
your SUBARU dealer. Also, for models sounds and the hazard warning flashers
operation.
with a multi function display, the setting flash if someone attempts to break into
can be changed using the display. For ! Canada-spec. models your vehicle.
details, refer to “Audible signal setting” NOTE The system can be armed or disarmed
F3-62. Operation is subject to the following with the remote transmitter.
& Replacing the battery two conditions: (1) this device may not The system will not be activated when the
cause interference, and (2) this device key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Refer to “Battery replacement” F11-45. must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause unde- Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
& Replacing lost transmitters sired operation of the device. for activation at the time of shipment from
If you lose a transmitter or want to the factory. You can set the system for
purchase additional transmitters (up to NOTE deactivation yourself or have it done by
four can be programmed), your transmit- your SUBARU dealer.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est auto-
ters should be reprogrammed for security risée seulement aux deux conditions
reasons. For details, contact your suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de & System operation
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispo- The alarm system will sound the following
programmed into the remote keyless entry sitif doit être prêt à accepter tout alarms when triggered.
system. brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même . The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
si ce brouillage est susceptible de seconds.
& Certification for remote key- compromettre le fonctionnement du . The hazard warning flashers will flash
less entry system dispositif. for 30 seconds.
! U.S.-spec. models If any of the doors or the rear gate/trunk lid
FCC ID: CWTWB1U811 remains open after the 30-second period,
FCC ID: CWTWBU766 the horn will continue to sound for a
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door or the
This device complies with part 15 of the
rear gate/trunk lid is closed while the horn & Activating and deactivating NOTE
is sounding, the horn will stop sounding the alarm system You may have the above setting
with a delay of up to 30 seconds. change done by your SUBARU dealer.
To change the setting of your vehicle’s 2
The alarm is triggered by: alarm system for activation or deactiva- & If you have accidentally trig-
. Opening any of the doors, the rear gate tion, do the following.
gered the alarm system
or trunk lid 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as “Disarming the system” F2-13. ! To stop the alarm
forced entry (only models with shock 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all Do any of the following operations:
sensors (dealer option)) doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a . Press any button on the remote trans-
5-door). mitter.
NOTE 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
The alarm system can be set to trigger position. position.
the illumination of the following interior 4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
lights. of the driver’s power door locking switch, NOTE
. Map lights (models with moonroof) open the driver’s door within the following Only registered keys will stop the
. Dome light (illuminates only when 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without alarm. If the immobilizer transponder
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” releasing the switch. The setting will then is not registered, the alarm will not
position) be changed as follows. stop.
. Cargo area light (illuminates only
when the cargo area light switch is in If the system was previously activated:
the “DOOR” position) The odometer/trip meter screen displays & Arming the system
“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,
The notifications regarding the map ! Tips
indicating that the system is now deacti-
lights, dome light and cargo area light vated. . The system can be armed even if the
are deactivated as the factory setting. A If the system was previously deacti- engine hood, windows and/or moonroof
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- vated: are open. Always make sure that they are
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for fully closed before arming the system.
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
details.
“AL on” and the horn sounds once, . The 30-second standby time can be
indicating that the system is now acti- eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed
vated. by your SUBARU dealer.
. If your vehicle is a 4-door and you open
the trunk using the remote transmitter’s
– CONTINUED –
“ ” button with the alarm system armed, the 5-door). than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
the system will be temporarily placed in a gate on the 5-door) will lock, an electronic
standby state. The system will go back to chirp will sound once, the hazard warning
the surveillance state upon locking the flashers will flash once, and the security
trunk. indicator light will start flashing rapidly.
. The system is in the standby mode for After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (stand-
a 30-second period after locking the doors by time), the indicator lights will then flash
with the remote transmitter. The security slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
indicator light will flash at short intervals onds), indicating that the system has been
during this period. armed for surveillance.
. If any of the following actions are done If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid)
during the standby period, the system will is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
not switch to the surveillance state. sounds five times, the hazard warning
– Doors are unlocked using the re- flashers flash five times to alert you that
mote transmitter. Transmitter
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system the doors (or the rear gate) are not
– Any door (including the rear gate of properly closed. When you close the door,
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
a 5-door or the trunk of a 4-door) is system the system will automatically arm and
opened. doors will automatically lock.
– Ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ! To arm the system using power
position. door locking switches
! To arm the system using remote
1. Close all windows.
transmitter
2. Remove the key from the ignition
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if switch.
equipped). 3. Open the doors and get out of the
2. Remove the key from the ignition vehicle.
switch. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is
3. Open the doors and get out of the locked.
vehicle. 5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and the 5-door) but leave only the driver’s door
the trunk lid on the 4-door) are locked. or the front passenger’s door open.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on 6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
security indicator light will then change 11. The security indicator light will con-
slowly (once approximately every 3 sec- tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
onds from twice approximately every 2 indicating that the system is in the valet
seconds), indicating that the alarm system mode. 2
has been disarmed.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
NOTE your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
After disarming the alarm system, mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
briefly press the “ ” button a second ing the alarm system” F2-11.
time within 5 seconds to unlock all
other doors and the rear gate (5-door). & Passive arming
! Emergency disarming ! Passive arming mode
If you cannot disarm the system using the When passive arming mode has been
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of programmed by the dealer, arming of the
the power door locking switch to set the transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too system is automatically accomplished
door locks. without using the remote transmitter. Note
weak), you can disarm the system without
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
using the transmitter as follows.
sound once, the hazard warning flashers MANUALLY LOCKED.
will flash once and the security indicator . Turn the ignition switch from the
“LOCK” (off) to the “ON” position with a ! To enter the passive mode
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the registered key. If you wish to program the passive arming
indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice mode, have it done by your SUBARU
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat- & Valet mode dealer.
ing that the system has been armed for When you choose the valet mode, the ! Arming the system
surveillance. alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only CAUTION
& Disarming the system for locking and unlocking the doors and
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than rear gate (5-door) and panic activation. In passive mode, the system will
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The automatically activate the alarm but
To enter the valet mode, change the WILL NOT automatically lock the
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for doors. In order to lock the doors
chirp will sound twice, the hazard warning deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating you must either lock them as in-
flashers will flash twice. The flashing of the and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
– CONTINUED –
This switch also has a one-touch auto up NOTE ! Operating the passengers’ win-
feature that allows the window to be . If a window detects an impact simi- dows
closed fully without holding the switch. lar to that caused by trapping an object
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release (for example, when the vehicle encoun- 2
it, and the window will fully close. To stop ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
the window halfway, push the switch down ment function may operate.
lightly. . The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
NOTE ment function operates.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected . If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
due to situations such as battery or nected due to situations such as
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
up/down function is deactivated. Initi- entrapment function is deactivated.
alize the power window to reactivate Initialize the power window to reacti-
the one-touch auto up/down function. vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
Refer to “Initialization of power win- fer to “Initialization of power window” To open:
dow” F2-19. F2-19. Push the appropriate switch down and
! Anti-entrapment function While closing the driver’s window auto- hold it until the window reaches the
matically, if the window senses a sub- desired position.
CAUTION stantial enough object trapped between To close:
the window and the window frame, it Pull the switch up and hold it until the
. Never attempt to test this func- automatically moves down slightly and window reaches the desired position.
tion using fingers, hands or other stops.
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
– CONTINUED –
! Locking the passengers’ windows & Power window operation by ! Operating the windows
passengers
! Passenger’s side power window
switches
1) Lock To open:
2) Unlock Press the switch down and hold it until the
To lock: window reaches the desired position.
Press the lock switch. When the lock To close:
Each passenger window can be controlled Pull the switch up and hold it until the
switch is in the lock position, the passen-
by the power window switch located on window reaches the desired position.
gers’ windows cannot be opened or
the door.
closed. When the lock switch on the power
To unlock: window switch cluster, located on the
Press the lock switch again. driver’s side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper-
ated with the passengers’ switches.
& Initialization of power win- Trunk lid (4-door) & To open and close the trunk
dow lid from outside
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
WARNING The trunk lid can be opened using the 2
to situations such as battery or fuse remote keyless entry system. Refer to
replacement, the following functions are . To prevent dangerous exhaust “Remote keyless entry system” F2-7.
deactivated. gas from entering the vehicle, To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
. One-touch auto up/down function always keep the trunk lid closed trunk lid down until the latch engages.
. Anti-entrapment function while driving.
NOTE
. Help prevent children, adults or
Initialize the power window using the Do not leave your valuables in the
animals from locking themselves
following procedure to reactivate these trunk when you leave your vehicle.
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
functions.
days, the temperature in the
1. Close the driver’s door. trunk could quickly become high & To open the trunk lid from
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” enough to cause death or serious inside
position. heat-related injuries including
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway brain damage to anyone locked
by pushing down the power window inside, particularly for small chil-
switch. dren.
4. Pull up the power window switch and . When leaving the vehicle, either
close the window completely. Continue close all windows and lock all
pulling up the switch for approximately 1 doors. Also make certain that the
second after the window is closed com- trunk is closed.
pletely.
5. Open the driver’s side window com-
pletely by fully pushing down the power
windows switch.
– CONTINUED –
& Internal trunk lid release time. . Load the trunk so that cargo can
handle not strike the release handle. If
WARNING the cargo hits the handle while
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from the vehicle is being driven, the
Never allow any child to get in the handle may be pulled up and the
inside the trunk. In the event children or trunk and play with the release
adults become locked inside the trunk, the trunk lid may open. That may
handle. If the driver starts the vehi- cause cargo to fall out of the
handle allows them to open the lid. The cle without knowing that a child is
handle is located on the inside of the trunk trunk, which could create a traffic
inside the trunk and the child opens safety hazard.
lid. the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured. ! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
CAUTION correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, of the handle.
pull the yellow handle upward as indicated
by the arrow on the handle.
This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then,
push up the lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately 2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is blade. Slide the screwdriver blade from
exposed to ambient light even for a short the slit aperture of the lock assembly to
the end until you hear a click. released. Rear gate (5-door)
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer. & Lock/unlock 2
In this case, press the “ ” button on the The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
key lug to release the latch, then close the using any of the following systems.
trunk lid. . Power door locking switch: Refer to
Also, if the movement of the trunk lid “Power door locking switches” F2-6.
release handle feels restricted or not . Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
entirely smooth during operation, or the “Remote keyless entry system” F2-7.
handle and/or handle base is cracked,
contact your SUBARU dealer. NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
This places the latch in the locked posi-
ing system or other causes, you can
tion.
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever.
For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –
if the rear gate cannot be opened” F9-
18.
& Open/close firmly until the latch engages. when loading or unloading car-
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you go.
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
WARNING NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
. To prevent dangerous exhaust to a discharged vehicle battery, a
gas from entering the vehicle, malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
always keep the rear gate closed ing system or other causes, you can
while driving. unlock it by manually operating the
. Do not attempt to shut the rear rear gate lock release lever. For the
gate while holding the recessed procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the
grip. Also avoid closing the rear rear gate cannot be opened” F9-18.
gate by pulling on the recessed
To open: grip from inside the cargo space.
First unlock the rear gate lock then push There is a danger of your hand
the rear gate opener button. being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
To close: ing or closing the rear gate and
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
Moonroof (if equipped) to remain in the vehicle. Failure ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat- & Moonroof switches
WARNING ing the moonroof. 2
! Tilting moonroof
. Never try to check the anti-en-
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, trapment function by deliberately
head or any objects protrude from placing part of your body in the
the moonroof. A person could be moonroof.
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly. CAUTION
. The vehicle turns sharply. . Do not sit on the edge of the open
. The vehicle is involved in an moonroof.
accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
. Body parts protruding from the falling snow or extremely cold
vehicle are struck by outside conditions have caused it to
objects. freeze shut.
1) Raise
To avoid serious personal injury . The anti-entrapment function 2) Lower
caused by entrapment, always con- does not operate when the moon-
form to the following instructions roof is being tilted down. Be sure The tilting function is activated only when
without exception. to confirm that it is safe to do so the moonroof is fully closed.
. Before closing the moonroof, before tilting the moonroof down. To raise:
make sure that no one’s hands, . If the moonroof does not close, Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
arms, head or other objects will we recommend that you have the switch momentarily. The moonroof raises
be accidentally caught in the system checked by a SUBARU completely.
moonroof. dealer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- To lower:
ways remove the key from the The moonroof has both tilting and sliding Press and hold the front side of the “UP/
ignition switch for safety and functions. DOWN” switch until the preferred position
never allow an unattended child has reached.
The moonroof operates only when the
– CONTINUED –
Release the switch after the moonroof has To stop the moonroof at a selected mid- of your body.
been raised or has been lowered com- way position while opening or closing it,
pletely. Pressing the switch continuously momentarily push the switch to the
may cause damage to the moonroof. “OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side. NOTE
! Sliding moonroof For the sake of safety, it is recom-
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, mended that you avoid driving with the
wipe away water on the roof prior to moonroof fully opened.
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment. & Sun shade
NOTE
Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this oc-
curs, use the moonroof at the initial
stop position of 16 in (40 cm) away
from the fully closed position.
Driving information display................................. 3-24 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-72
Clock ................................................................. 3-27 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-72
Multi function display ........................................ 3-28 Daytime running light system............................. 3-73
Models without multi function display ................. 3-28 Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-73
Safety precautions ............................................. 3-28 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-74
Features ............................................................ 3-29 Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............... 3-74
Locations........................................................... 3-29 Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with
Basic operation .................................................. 3-29 HID headlights) ................................................ 3-74
Welcome screen................................................. 3-29 Fog light switch (if equipped) ........................... 3-75
Ending screen.................................................... 3-30 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-75
Self-check screen............................................... 3-30 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-77
Interruption screen ............................................. 3-31 Rear window wiper and washer switch –
Basic screens .................................................... 3-32 5-door ............................................................. 3-78
Selection screen ................................................ 3-38 Mirrors ................................................................ 3-79
Date and time settings........................................ 3-40 Inside mirror...................................................... 3-79
Image quality and volume settings...................... 3-47 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-79
Screen settings .................................................. 3-50 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®
Maintenance settings.......................................... 3-57 (if equipped) .................................................... 3-80
Driving history registration ................................. 3-61 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-86
Car settings ....................................................... 3-62 Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-88
Initialize ............................................................. 3-68 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-89
Light control switch ........................................... 3-71 Horn .................................................................... 3-90
Precautions and tips .......................................... 3-71
Headlights.......................................................... 3-71
Ignition switch you are driving, it could turn the is not running.
ignition switch from the “ON” posi- . Using electrical accessories for a
& Safety precautions tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” (off) long time with the ignition switch in the
position, thereby stopping the en- “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
WARNING gine. Also, if the key is attached to a battery to go dead.
keyholder or to a large bunch of . If the ignition switch will not move 3
. Never turn the ignition switch to other keys, centrifugal force may act from the “LOCK” (off) position to the
“LOCK” (off) while the vehicle is on it as the vehicle moves, resulting “ACC” position, turn the steering wheel
being driven or towed because in unwanted turning of the ignition slightly to the left and right as you turn
that will lock the steering wheel, switch. the ignition switch.
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it & LOCK (off)
takes a much greater effort than & Ignition switch positions
usual to steer. The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- the steering wheel when you remove the
ways remove the key from the key.
ignition switch for safety and
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
never allow an unattended child
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
as you turn the key.
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
The key can be turned from the “ACC” to to the “START” position and again try to
“LOCK” (off) position only when the select start the engine.
lever is in the “P” position (CVT models)
and the key is pushed in while turning it NOTE
(all models). The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases:
& ACC
In this position the electrical accessories
(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after . The key is near another key that
the engine is started. contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
& START transmitter.
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When & Key reminder chime
the key is released (after the engine has . The key grip is touching another key
started), the key automatically returns to or a metallic key holder. The reminder chime sounds when the
the “ON” position. driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” (off) or “ACC”
CAUTION position.
Do not turn the ignition switch to the The chime stops under the following
“START” position while the engine conditions.
is running. . when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
If your registered key fails to start the . when the key is removed from the
engine, pull out the key once (the security ignition switch
indicator light will blink), and then insert . when the driver’s door is closed
the key into the ignition switch and turn it
& Ignition switch light (if Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges
equipped)
For easy access to the ignition switch in NOTE
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi- Liquid-crystal displays are used in
nates when the driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
some of the meters and gauges on 3
the combination meter. You will find
the remote keyless entry transmitter. their indications hard to see if you wear
The light remains illuminated for several polarized glasses.
tens of seconds and then gradually turns
off under the following conditions. & Combination meter illumina-
. when the driver’s door is closed tion
. when the doors are unlocked using the When the ignition switch is turned to the
remote keyless entry transmitter “ON” position, the various parts of the
The light turns off immediately under the combination meter are illuminated in the
following conditions. The hazard warning flasher is used to following sequence.
warn other drivers when you have to park
. when the ignition switch is turned to the 1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
“ON” position needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal
The hazard warning flasher works regard-
. when all doors and the rear gate (5- less of the position of the ignition switch. display illuminate.
door) are locked using the remote keyless 2. Meter and gauge indications each
entry transmitter To turn on the hazard warning flasher, show MAX position.
push the hazard warning button on the 3. Meter and gauge indications each
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, show MIN position.
push the button again. 4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
NOTE gins.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
– CONTINUED –
Also, if you open and close the driver’s while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If result.
door within 10 seconds of illumination of you do not press the trip knob within 10
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip seconds of illumination of the odometer/
meter will turn off. trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn NOTE
off. If the connection between the combina-
& Double trip meter Also, if you open and close the driver’s tion meter and battery is broken for any 3
door within 10 seconds of illumination of reason such as vehicle maintenance or
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip fuse replacement, the data recorded on
meter will turn off. the trip meter will be lost.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the & Tachometer
trip knob. The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
1) Trip knob mage to the engine.
*: They cannot be displayed when the
This meter displays the two trip meters ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
The trip meter shows the distance that the
and keep the knob pressed for more than
vehicle has been driven since you last set
2 seconds.
it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition CAUTION
switch is in the “LOCK” (off) or “ACC”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light To ensure safety, do not attempt to
up. It is possible to switch between the A change the function of the indicator
trip meter and B trip meter indications during driving, as an accident could
– CONTINUED –
& Fuel gauge driver’s door, the fuel gauge indication will efficiency.
turn off.
NOTE
NOTE . The ECO gauge shows only an
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel approximate indication of fuel effi-
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler ciency.
door (lid) is located on the right side of . After resetting the trip meter, the
the vehicle. average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
& ECO gauge (if equipped) Before that time, the ECO gauge does
not operate.
Fuel gauge
1) Trip knob
The fuel gauge is displayed when the
ignition is in the “ON” position, and it
shows the approximate amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The gauge indication may change slightly
during braking, turning or acceleration due
to fuel level movement in the tank. 1) U.S.-spec. models
If you press the trip knob while the ignition 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
switch is in the “LOCK” (off) or “ACC” The ECO gauge shows the difference
position, the fuel gauge will light up and between the current rate of fuel consump-
indicate the amount of fuel remaining in tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
the tank. If, while the fuel gauge is tion since the trip meter was last reset.
indicating the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank, you (a) do not press the trip knob If the needle of the gauge moves towards
for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the the right side, this indicates better fuel
Warning and indicator lights : CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
function indicator light tor light
& Initial illumination for system : Coolant temperature high warning light : Cruise control indicator light
check (if equipped)
: Charge warning light
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate when the ignition switch is
: Cruise control set indicator light 3
: Oil pressure warning light (if equipped)
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
permits checking the operation of the : Engine low oil level warning light : Automatic headlight beam leveler
bulbs. : Windshield washer fluid warning light warning light (models with HID head-
Apply the parking brake and turn the lights)
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For (CVT models) If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
the system check, the following lights burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
illuminate and then turn off after several : Low tire pressure warning light corresponding system.
seconds or after the engine has started. (U.S.- spec. models) Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
: Seatbelt warning light / : ABS warning light for repair.
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the / : Brake system warning light & Seatbelt warning light
seatbelt.) and chime
: Low fuel warning light
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start
light warning device at the driver’s and front
assist OFF indicator light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off passenger’s seat, as required by current
only when the front seat passenger : Door open warning light safety standards.
fastens the seatbelt.) With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
: AWD warning light (CVT models)
: SRS airbag system warning light position, this device reminds the driver
: Power steering warning light and front passenger to fasten their seat-
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag belts by illuminating the warning lights in
ON indicator light : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
the locations indicated in the following
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag illustration and sounding a chime.
tion indicator light
OFF indicator light
– CONTINUED –
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to & SRS airbag system & Front passenger’s frontal
“Front seats” F1-2. warning light airbag ON and OFF indica-
If the seatbelt warning device for the front tors
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
WARNING
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the If the warning light exhibits any of 3
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is the following conditions, there may
deactivated even when the front passen- be a malfunction in the seatbelt
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
take the following actions. system. Immediately take your vehi-
. Ensure that no article is placed on the cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
seat other than a child restraint system to have the system checked. Unless
and its child occupant, although we checked and properly repaired, the
strongly recommend that all children sit seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
in the rear seat properly restrained. airbag will not operate properly in
. Ensure that there is no article left in the the event of a collision, which may
seatback pocket. increase the risk of injury.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- . Flashing or flickering of the warn- indicator
sition and seatback of front passenger’s ing light / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
seat are locked into place securely by . No illumination of the warning indicator
moving the seat back and forth. light when the ignition switch is The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
If still the seatbelt warning device for front first turned to the “ON” position and OFF indicators show you the status of
passenger’s seat does not function cor- . Continuous illumination of the the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- warning light The indicators are located next to the
tions described above, immediately con- . Illumination of the warning light clock in the center portion of the dash-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- while driving board.
tion. When the ignition switch is turned to the
For details about the components mon- “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
airbag system monitors” F1-64. which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
– CONTINUED –
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may – Blinking or illuminated in After that, this indicator light/warning light
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after RED: changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
several driving trips. You should have your Safely stop the vehicle as tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
vehicle checked by an authorized soon as possible, and refer turns off when the engine is warmed up
SUBARU dealer immediately. to the emergency steps to sufficiently.
take in the case of engine 3
& Coolant temperature overheating. After that, have
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases over the specified range, the
low indicator light/Cool- the system checked by your
indicator light/warning light blinks in
ant temperature high nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer
RED. At this time, the engine is close to
warning light to “Engine overheating” F9-
overheating.
13.
CAUTION – Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in-
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning
. After turning the ignition switch The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At
to the “ON” position, if this malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating.
indicator light/warning light be- SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
haves in any of the following When the indicator light/warning light
tion. blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
ways, the electrical system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
This coolant temperature low indicator refer to the emergency steps to take in the
SUBARU dealer immediately for light/coolant temperature high warning
an inspection. case of engine overheating. Refer to
light has the following three functions. “Engine overheating” F9-13. After that,
– It remains blinking in RED. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- have the system checked by your nearest
– It remains illuminated in RED cient warming up of the engine SUBARU dealer.
for more than 2 seconds. . Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating Also, if the indicator light/warning light
– It remains blinking in RED and often blinks in RED, the electrical system
BLUE alternately. . Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
may be malfunctioning. Contact your
. While driving, if this indicator ing condition of the engine
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
light/warning light behaves in For a system check, this indicator light/
any of the following ways, take warning light illuminates in RED for NOTE
the specified appropriate mea- approximately 2 seconds when the igni- If the engine is restarted after a certain
sure listed below. tion switch is turned to the “ON” position. driving condition, this indicator light/
– CONTINUED –
warning light may illuminate in RED. illuminated, contact your nearest NOTE
However, this is not a malfunction if the SUBARU dealer immediately. . After replacing or adding the engine
indicator light/warning light turns off For details about checking the engine oil oil, if the engine oil level is within the
after a short time. level or adding the engine oil, refer to normal range when restarting the en-
“Engine oil” F11-8. gine on a level surface, the warning
& Charge warning light light will turn off.
CAUTION . The warning light may illuminate
If this light illuminates when the engine is temporarily in the following conditions
running, it may indicate that the charging Do not operate the engine with the because a low oil level may be detected
system is not working properly. oil pressure warning light illumi- as a result of significant oil movement
nated. This may cause serious en- in the engine.
If the light illuminates while driving or does gine damage.
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the – when the vehicle is considerably
engine at the first safe opportunity and inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– when the vehicle has continu-
check the alternator belt. If the belt is & Engine low oil level ously accelerated and decelerated
loose, broken or if the belt is in good warning light
condition but the light remains illuminated, – when the vehicle is continuously
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer This light illuminates when the engine oil turned
immediately. level decreases to the lower limit. – when the vehicle is driven on a
If the engine low oil level warning light road that alternates continuously
& Oil pressure warning illuminates while driving, park the vehicle between uphill and downhill
light in a safe and level location, and then
If this light illuminates when the engine is
check the engine oil level. When the & Windshield washer
engine oil level is not within the normal fluid warning light
running, it may indicate that the engine oil range, refill with engine oil. Refer to
pressure is low and the lubricating system “Engine oil” F11-8. This light illuminates when the fluid level in
is not working properly. the windshield washer fluid tank de-
If the warning light does not turn off after
If the light illuminates while driving or does refilling the engine oil, or the warning light creases to the lower limit (approximately
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the illuminates even though the engine oil 1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).
engine at the first safe opportunity and level is within the normal range, have the
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
& AT OIL TEMP warning should be checked monthly when cold Your vehicle has also been equipped with
light (CVT models) and inflated to the inflation pressure a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
recommended by the vehicle manufac- when the system is not operating properly.
If this light illuminates when the engine is turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
running, it may indicate that the transmis- pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
sion fluid temperature is too hot. a different size than the size indicated on When the system detects a malfunction, 3
If the light illuminates while driving, im- the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- the telltale will flash for approximately one
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place sure label, you should determine the minute and then remain continuously
and let the engine idle until the warning proper tire inflation pressure for those illuminated. This sequence will continue
light turns off. tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
! Transmission control system warn- As an added safety feature, your vehicle malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
ing has been equipped with a tire pressure system may not be able to detect or signal
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes a low tire pressure telltale when one or
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
after the engine has started, it may malfunctions may occur for a variety of
more of your tires is significantly under- reasons, including the installation of re-
indicate that the transmission control inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
system is not working properly. Contact placement or alternate tires or wheels on
pressure telltale illuminates, you should the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service stop and check your tires as soon as
immediately. functioning properly. Always check the
possible, and inflate them to the proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
& Low tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
one or more tires or wheels on your
warning light (U.S.-spec. vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
models) reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, to continue to function properly.
When the ignition switch is turned to the and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate stea-
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- dily after blinking for approximately one
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 Please note that the TPMS is not a minute, have the system inspected by
seconds to check that the tire pressure substitute for proper tire maintenance, your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning and it is the driver’s responsibility to possible.
properly. If there is no problem and all tires maintain correct tire pressure, even if
are properly inflated, the light will turn off. under-inflation has not reached the level WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale. If this light does not illuminate
– CONTINUED –
briefly after the ignition switch is for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting.
steadily after blinking for approxi- If the light illuminates steadily after CAUTION
mately one minute, you should have blinking for approximately one min-
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- ute, promptly contact a SUBARU . If any of the following conditions
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as dealer to have the system inspected. occur, we recommend that you
soon as possible. have the ABS system repaired at
If this light illuminates while driving, the first available opportunity by
never brake suddenly and keep CAUTION your SUBARU dealer.
driving straight ahead while gradu- – The warning light does not
ally reducing speed. Then slowly The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition
pull off the road to a safe place. is NOT a substitute for manually switch is turned to the “ON”
Otherwise an accident involving checking tire pressure. The tire position.
pressure should be checked peri-
serious vehicle damage and serious – The warning light illuminates
personal injury could occur. odically (at least monthly) using a
when the ignition switch is
tire gauge. After any change to tire
If this light still illuminates while turned to the “ON” position,
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
driving after adjusting the tire pres- but it does not turn off even
itoring system will not re-check tire
sure, a tire may have significant when the vehicle speed ex-
inflation pressures until the vehicle
damage and a fast leak that causes ceeds approximately 25 mph
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have (40 km/h).
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to – The warning light illuminates
as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the during driving.
When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- . When the warning light is on (and
wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures the brake system warning light is
original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low off), the ABS function shuts
being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire down. However, the conventional
sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn brake system continues to oper-
steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be ate normally.
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for
the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires. The ABS warning light illuminates to-
four road wheels. Contact your gether with the brake system warning light
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
if the EBD system malfunctions. For When the battery becomes fully charged, of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
further details of the EBD system mal- the light will turn off. switch in the “ON” position and with the
function warning, refer to “Electronic parking brake fully released.
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system & Brake system If the brake system warning light should
warning” F3-17. warning light (red) illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
3
NOTE WARNING
If the warning light behavior is as switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
described in the following conditions, . Driving with the brake system indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
the ABS system may be considered warning light on is dangerous. brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
normal. This indicates your brake system stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
may not be working properly. If and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
. The warning light illuminates when
the light remains illuminated, level is below the “MIN” mark in the
the ignition switch is turned to the
have the brakes inspected by a reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
“ON” position and turns off approxi-
SUBARU dealer immediately. the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
mately 2 seconds after the engine has
dealer for repair.
started. . If at all in doubt about whether
. The warning light illuminates right the brakes are operating prop- ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
after the engine is started but turns off erly, do not drive the vehicle. (EBD) system warning
immediately, remaining off. Have your vehicle towed to the The brake system warning light also
. The warning light remains illumi- nearest SUBARU dealer for re- illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
nated after the engine has been started, pair. EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
but it turns off when the vehicle speed together with the ABS warning light.
reaches approximately 25 mph (40 This light has the following functions. The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
km/h). the brake system warning light and ABS
! Parking brake warning
. The warning light illuminates during warning light illuminate simultaneously
driving, but it turns off immediately and The light illuminates with the parking
during driving.
remains off. brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
When driving with an insufficient battery parking brake is fully released. tional braking system will still function.
voltage such as when the engine is jump However, the rear wheels will be more
started, the ABS warning light may illumi- ! Brake fluid level warning prone to locking when the brakes are
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage This light illuminates when the brake fluid applied harder than usual and the vehi-
and does not indicate a malfunction. level has dropped to near the “MIN” level cle’s motion may therefore become some-
– CONTINUED –
what harder to control. mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). inspected at an authorized SUBARU
If the brake system warning light and ABS It only operates when the ignition switch is dealer.
warning light illuminate simultaneously, in the “ON” position.
take the following steps. ! Hill start assist OFF indicator light
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, CAUTION
While the Hill start assist system is
flat place. Promptly put fuel in the tank when- deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
2. Shut down the engine, apply the ever the low fuel warning light indicator light illuminates continuously to
parking brake and then restart it. illuminates. Engine misfires as a inform the driver that the Hill start assist
3. Release the parking brake. If both result of an empty tank could cause system is not operational.
warning lights turn off, the EBD system damage to the engine.
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to & Door open warning
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the light
system inspected. NOTE
4. If both warning lights illuminate again This light does not turn off unless the The warning light illuminates if any door,
and remain illuminated after the engine tank is replenished up to an internal the rear gate (5-door models) or trunk lid
has been restarted, shut down the engine fuel quantity of approximately 4.5 US (4-door models) is not fully closed. This
again, apply the parking brake, and check gal (17 liters, 3.7 Imp gal). function is effective even if the ignition
the brake fluid level. switch is in the “LOCK” (off) or “ACC”
position, or the key is removed from the
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the & Hill start assist warning ignition switch.
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be light/Hill start assist
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the OFF indicator light Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the nated before you start to drive.
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the ! Hill start assist warning light & All-Wheel Drive warn-
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. While the engine is running, if there are ing light (CVT models)
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. system, the warning light will illuminate. This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with
tires of differing diameters fitted on the
& Low fuel warning light WARNING wheels or with an excessively low air
pressure in any of the tires.
The low fuel warning light illuminates When the Hill start assist warning
when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi- light illuminates, have the vehicle
CAUTION have the vehicle inspected immedi- tion of the power steering control
ately. system.
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light blinking can damage
NOTE & Vehicle Dynamics
the powertrain. If the AWD warning Control warning light/
light starts to blink, promptly park in If the steering wheel is operated in the
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
3
a safe place and check whether the following ways, the power steering
tires have differing diameters and control system may temporarily limit trol operation indicator
whether any of the tires has an the power assist in order to prevent the light
excessively low inflation pressure. system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
overheating. light
& Power steering warn- . The steering wheel is operated fre-
ing light quently and turned sharply while the CAUTION
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
This warning light illuminates when the speeds, such as while frequently turn- The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ing the steering wheel during parallel tem provides its ABS control
position and turns off after the engine parking. through the electrical circuit of the
has started. This indicates that the warn- . The steering wheel remains in the ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
ing system is working properly. fully turned position for a long period is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
While the engine is running, this warning of time. Control system becomes unable to
light illuminates when a malfunction has provide ABS control. As a result, the
At this time, there will be more resis- Vehicle Dynamics Control system
been detected in the electric power steer-
tance when steering. However this is also becomes inoperative, causing
ing system.
not a malfunction. Normal steering the warning light to illuminate.
CAUTION force will be restored after the steering Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
wheel is not operated for a while and Control and ABS systems are inop-
When the power steering warning the power steering control system has erative in this case, the ordinary
light is illuminated, there may be an opportunity to cool down. However, functions of the brake system are
more resistance when the steering if the power steering is operated in a still available. You will be safe while
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to non-standard way which causes power driving with this condition, but drive
the nearest SUBARU dealer and assist limitation to occur too fre- carefully and have your vehicle
quently, that may result in a malfunc-
– CONTINUED –
checked at a SUBARU dealer as the ignition switch is turned to the should turn off as soon as the engine
soon as possible. “ON” position and turns off approxi- has warmed up.
mately 2 seconds after the engine has . The indicator light illuminates when
started. the engine has developed a problem
NOTE . The warning light illuminates right and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle after the engine is started but turns off malfunction indicator light is on.
Dynamics Control system itself mal- immediately, remaining off. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
functions, the warning light only illumi- . The warning light illuminates after probably malfunctioning under the follow-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock the engine has started and turns off ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
Brake System) remains fully opera- while the vehicle is subsequently being at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
tional. driven.
. The light does not turn off even after
. The warning light illuminates when . The warning light illuminates during
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
the electronic control system of the driving, but it turns off immediately and
has warmed up) after the engine has
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system remains off.
started.
malfunctions. . The warning light illuminates when
the engine has stalled and continues to
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
illuminate after the engine has been
& Vehicle Dynamics
probably inoperative under any of the Control OFF indicator
following conditions. Have your vehicle restarted. However, it will turn off once
the vehicle starts moving. light
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- The light illuminates when the Vehicle
. The warning light does not illuminate tion indicator light Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
when the ignition switch is turned to the to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
The indicator light flashes during activa- trol system.
“ON” position.
tion of the skid suppression function and
. The warning light illuminates while the during activation of the traction control The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
vehicle is running. function. probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
NOTE NOTE checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
If the warning light behavior is as . The light may remain illuminated for ately.
described in the following examples, a short period of time after the engine . The light does not illuminate when the
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system has been started, especially in cold ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
may be considered normal. weather. This does not indicate the position.
. The warning light illuminates when existence of a problem. The light
. The light does not turn off even once example, an unauthorized duplicate) is & Select lever/gear position in-
several seconds have elapsed after the used, the security indicator light illumi- dicator (CVT models)
ignition switch has been turned to the nates. For details about the immobilizer
“ON” position. system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-2.
– CONTINUED –
& Turn signal indicator speed and have your vehicle in- & Headlight indicator
lights spected at a SUBARU dealer as light (if equipped)
soon as possible.
These lights show the operation of the turn This indicator light illuminates under the
signal or lane change signal. following conditions.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink & Cruise control set in- . when the light switch is turned to the
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned dicator light (if “ ” or “ ” position
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. equipped) . when the light control switch is in the
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-37. “AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
This light illuminates when vehicle speed nate automatically
& High beam indicator has been set to use the cruise control
light function. Refer to “To set cruise control”
F7-39.
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode. & Automatic headlight
This indicator light also illuminates when beam leveler warning
the headlight flasher is operated. light (models with HID
headlights)
& Cruise control indica-
tor light (if equipped) This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
This light illuminates when the cruise normally.
control main button is pressed to activate If this light illuminates while driving or does
the cruise control function. For details, not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-39. turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
CAUTION
your SUBARU dealer.
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi- & Front fog light indicator
nates, the cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
light flashes at the same time. At This indicator light illuminates while the
this time, avoid driving at high front fog lights are illuminated.
Information display (if & Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi-
equipped) tor cation
NOTE
For models with color multi function 3
display, refer to “Multi function dis-
play” F3-28.
The outside temperature indicator shows When the outside temperature drops to
the outside temperature in a range from 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
−40 to 1228F (−40 to 508C). indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
1) Outside temperature indicator The indicator can give a false reading
2) Driving information display If the outside temperature drops to 378F
under any of the following conditions. (38C) or lower while the display is giving
3) Clock . When there is too much sun. an indication other than the outside
With the ignition switch in the “ACC” . During idling; while running at low temperature, the display switches to the
position, the clock appears on the display. speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine outside temperature indication and flashes
is restarted immediately following a shut- for 5 seconds before returning to its
With the ignition switch in the “ON” down.
position, the outside temperature indica- original indication.
tor, driving information display and clock . When the actual outside temperature If the display is already indicating an
all appear on the display. falls outside the specified indicator range. outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower
when the ignition switch is turned to the
– CONTINUED –
“ON” position, the indication does not sequence. ! Driving range on remaining fuel
flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
corresponding to that trip meter dis- ! Journey time display is giving a reading other than the
play is not shown until the vehicle has journey time, the display switches to the
subsequently covered a distance of 1 journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and
mile (or 1 km). returns to its original reading each time a
complete hour has elapsed.
! Current fuel consumption
NOTE
The journey time is reset when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
(off) position. It is also reset if the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
(off) or “ACC” position prior to restart-
ing of the engine.
! Average vehicle speed
The journey time shows the time that has
elapsed since the ignition switch was
turned to the “ON” position.
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This indication shows the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The journey time indication flashes each This display shows the average vehicle
time a complete hour has elapsed. If the speed since the trip meter was last reset.
– CONTINUED –
3. While the clock display is flashing, Multi function display & Safety precautions
press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds. The clock format will & Models without multi func- WARNING
then change. tion display
4. The clock display will continue to flash Always pay adequate attention to
for approximately 3 seconds to inform you NOTE safe driving when operating the
that the clock display has been changed. . For models with information display multi function display while the
If you want to change the clock display (black and white), refer to “Information vehicle is in motion. When operation
again, press and hold the “+” button for display” F3-23. of the multi-function display is dis-
approximately 2 seconds while the clock . When the vehicle is in motion, turbing your awareness and ability
display is flashing. certain functions and selections may to concentrate on driving, stop the
not be available. vehicle in a safe place before per-
The U.S.-spec models are not equipped forming operations on the screen.
with the multi function display. The other Also, do not concentrate on the
models may be equipped with the multi display while driving. Doing so may
function display or not, depending on the cause you to look away from the
model. road and could result in an accident.
& Features & Locations 5) Driving information display (For the dis-
played contents, refer to “Basic screens”
The multi function display has the follow- F3-32.)
ing functions.
Description Page & Basic operation
Displays useful messages, such
3
as warning information, etc. 3-31
If there is no warning message, the self- . The maintenance notification screen & Interruption screen
check is complete without notification. will be displayed under either of the
following conditions.
– The period of time remaining
until the registered notification date
is 15 days or less. 3
– The total driving distance remain-
ing until the registered notification
distance is approximately 311 miles
(500 km) or less.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed until either of the
following conditions is satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15 Warning information (display example)
Example of notification days or more. Useful messages, such as reminder in-
If there is a warning message or a – The total distance driven after the formation, vehicle information, warning
maintenance notification, the color of the registered notification distance is information, etc. may interrupt the current
icon corresponding to the item will turn approximately 311 miles (500 km) or screen and appear on the display accom-
yellow and the warning message or the more. panied by a beep. Take proper action
maintenance notification will be displayed. according to the message.
Take the appropriate actions based on the
messages indicated. The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. If
NOTE the warning screen can be displayed
. The self-check screen can be set to again, an information reminder “ ” will
on or off. For details, refer to “On/Off appear on the upper left part of the
setting” F3-59. display. To recall the message marked
. After performing the maintenance, with “ ” on the display, pull the “ /SET”
change the setting of the correspond- switch on the steering wheel toward you.
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” F3-57.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! ECO gauge screen ! ECO history screen Time range Width of bar graph
30 minutes 1 minute
60 minutes 2 minutes
120 minutes 4 minutes
1) Average fuel consumption corresponding 1) Average fuel consumption per unit time
to the driving distance of each trip meter (bar graph)
2) ECO gauge 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
The gauge pointer shows the difference (red line)
between the current fuel consumption and
the average fuel consumption that is This screen displays the fuel economy
displayed on the center part of the screen. history for the vehicle using a bar graph.
If the gauge pointer moves toward the The horizontal scale represents the past
green side, this indicates better fuel time range and the vertical scale repre-
efficiency. sents the fuel consumption. The green
bars show driving with good fuel economy
and the yellow bars show driving with poor
fuel economy.
The time range of the history can be set.
The width of the bar graph is adjusted as
follows depending on the set time range.
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem is being activated: the tires illuminate tem has been activated: the tires remain
When the vehicle stops
in yellow. illuminated in yellow while the Vehicle
1) Steering axle Dynamics Control System is activated.
1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation 1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-
ating indicator (flashing in yellow)
3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation
This screen displays the following vehicle
information.
. steering angle and driving wheel status
. activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
. activation status of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system
When the vehicle is being driven regularly
1) Power train (illuminated in blue) While driving, the vehicle wheels are
illuminated in blue and the driving direc-
– CONTINUED –
Calendar
1) Today’s date
When the “ /SET” switch is pulled and Clock (analog format)
2) Birthday/Anniversary
held, the selection screen can be dis-
played. In addition to the clock/calendar, the out-
The displayed contents can be set or side temperature and average fuel con-
customized from the selection screen. For sumption can also be displayed.
details, refer to “Selection screen” F3-38. You can select clock (analog format),
clock (digital format) or calendar. The
clock/calendar can also be set so that it
is not displayed. For details, refer to
“Clock screen setting” F3-54.
– CONTINUED –
Eco History Set and customize the time of logging fuel 30 min, 60 min or 120 min 3-52
consumption history.
Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter. 3-53
Defogger Set and customize the operation of the 15 minutes or Continuous 3-65
defogger.
Interior Light Set and customize the interior light off delay 10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 3-66
timer.
Auto Light Sensor Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto Low, Mid, High or Max
(models with auto on/off head- light sensor. 3-67
lights)
Go Back Return to top menu. —
Initialize Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-68
Lifetime Fuel Consumption Reset Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No 3-69
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Go Back — Return to the top menu. —
– CONTINUED –
! Birthday setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
40.
4. The selected item will be shown. 5. Select numbers by operating the “ ” 7. Select characters by operating the
– Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /
to set the selected item. switch toward you. SET” switch toward you.
– If you want to select the other item, – You can select characters of the
operate the “ ” switch to go back to English alphabet (upper case charac-
step 3. ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.
! If a birthday is approaching
If a birthday is approaching, the following
screen will be displayed accompanied by
a beep when the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position. This function
can be set on or off. For details, refer to 3
“Bypass screen setting” F3-55.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. The selected item will be shown. 5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”
select the “Anniversary” item. Then pull – Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET”
the “ /SET” switch toward you. to set the selected item. switch toward you.
– If you want to select another item,
operate the “ ” switch to go back to
step 3.
3. Select the item to set by operating the 6. After entering the date by repeating
“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” step 5, you can enter the name.
switch toward you.
! If an anniversary is approaching
If an anniversary is approaching, the
following screen will be displayed accom-
panied by a beep when the ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” position. This
function can be set on or off. For details, 3
refer to “Bypass screen setting” F3-55.
– CONTINUED –
6. The system will notify you that the ! Top display setting
setting is complete. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord- 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more.
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
“ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” switch setting is complete. select the “Cons” item. Then pull the “ /
toward you. SET” switch toward you.
! Fuel consumption screen setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-50.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more.
switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
the “ /SET” switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –
4. Select the displayed configuration by 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
operating the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull setting is complete. select the “Eco History” item. Then pull the
the “ /SET” switch toward you. “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Economy history setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-50.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more.
switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
the “ /SET” switch toward you.
4. Select the time of the logged fuel 6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
consumption history by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pulling
“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ / the “ /SET” switch toward you.
SET” switch toward you.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Triple Meter” item. Then pull
the “ /SET” switch toward you.
3. Select the setting location (left, center 4. Select the preferred item by operating
or right) by operating the “ ” or “ ” the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /
switch. Then pull the “ /SET” switch SET” switch toward you. 6. The system will notify you that the
toward you. If you also want to change the setting for setting is complete.
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
NOTE ! Clock screen setting
The same item cannot be selected for
the left, center or right location. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-50.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the preferred language by 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Languages” item. Then pull the operating the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then setting is complete.
“ /SET” switch toward you. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
& Maintenance settings
The items in the maintenance settings can
be set. To change the items, operate the
“ ” or “ ” switch toward you.
! Preparation for maintenance set-
tings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch
toward you to show the selection screen.
toward you.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or reaches 0 mile (0 km), the display will
“ ” switch and confirm the setting by show “0000” for the next 311 miles (500
pulling the “ /SET” switch toward you. km). After exceeding 311 miles (500
km), “_ _ _ _” will be displayed.
! Oil filter setting 3
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-58, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 2.
! Tires setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-58, but select the
“Tires” item in step 2.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
! Maintenance schedule setting select the “On/Off” item. Then pull the “ /
The setting procedure is the same as SET” switch toward you.
6. The system will notify you that the “Engine oil setting” F3-58, but select the
setting is complete. “Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
! On/Off setting
NOTE 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
. The notification will be displayed ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
with information of both date and tings” F3-57.
distance or either date or distance in
accordance with the setting
. When “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month”, “Day”, “Year” or “Distance”
item instead of numbers, the set noti-
fication will be deactivated.
. If the notification continues for 15
days or more, the system will display 3. The current setting will be displayed.
“_ _” on the screen. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to
. When the distance announcement enter the selection mode.
– CONTINUED –
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete. select the “Clear All Settings” item. Then
switch toward you. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Clear setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-57.
– CONTINUED –
registered directly without a notification. toward you to show the selection screen.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Audible Signal” item. Then pull “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete.
the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you. If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Hazard warning flasher setting 3. The current setting will be displayed. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
1. Perform the preparation steps accord- Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-62. enter the selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Hazard Warning Flasher” item. “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete.
Then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you. If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. For more
details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
! Defogger setting
3. The current setting will be displayed. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-62.
enter the selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No 5. The system will notify you that the
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To return setting is complete.
to the factory default settings, select “Yes”
– CONTINUED –
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No 5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If 7. The system will notify you that the
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To reset you are sure you want to proceed, select setting is complete.
the lifetime fuel consumption, select “Yes” “Yes” by operating the “ ” switch.
by operating the “ ” switch.
Light control switch & Headlights “ ” position: auto on/off headlights (if
equipped)
& Precautions and tips When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
CAUTION headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights 3
. Use of any lights for a long period and license plate lights are automatically
of time while the engine is not on or off depending on the level of the
running can cause the battery to ambient light.
discharge.
“ ” position
. Before leaving the vehicle, make The headlights are all off.
sure that the lights are turned off.
If the vehicle is left unattended NOTE
for a long time with the lights The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
illuminated, the battery may be To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on lights can be changed by a SUBARU
discharged. the end of the turn signal lever. dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer
“ ” position for details. Also, for models with a multi
NOTE Instrument panel illumination, headlights, function display, the setting can be
changed using the display. For details,
. Even if the key is removed from the parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license refer to “Multi function display” F3-28.
ignition switch, the lights can be illu-
minated by operating the light control plate lights are on.
switch from the “ ” (off) position to the
“ ” position
“ ” or “ ” position.
. If the driver’s door is opened while Instrument panel illumination, parking
the lights are illuminated and the key is lights, front side marker lights, rear side
removed from the ignition switch, the marker lights, tail lights and license plate
chirp sound will inform the driver that lights are on.
the lights are illuminated.
– CONTINUED –
! Sensor for the auto on/off head- & High/low beam change & Headlight flasher
lights (if equipped) (dimmer)
The sensor is on the instrument panel as To change from low beam to high beam, CAUTION
shown in the illustration. push the turn signal lever forward. When
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
the headlights are on high beam, the high
CAUTION position for more than just a few
beam indicator light “ ” on the combina-
seconds.
tion meter is also on.
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect To switch back to low beam, pull the lever To flash the headlights, pull the lever
the level of the ambient light cor- back to the center position. toward you and then release it. The high
rectly and the auto on/off headlights beam will stay on for as long as you hold
may not operate properly. the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the
“ ” (off) position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
& Daytime running light system level, the high beam headlights that Turn signal lever
have illuminated at reduced brightness
WARNING turn off, and the low beam headlights
turn on alternatively. At this time, the
The brightness of the illumination of instrument panel illumination, front
the high beam headlights is reduced side marker lights, tail lights and 3
by the daytime running light system. license plate lights are also illuminated.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
Illumination brightness con- To darken, turn the control dial downward. Headlight beam leveler (if
trol NOTE equipped)
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
& Automatic headlight beam
becomes the maximum and the auto- leveler (models with HID
matic dimming function does not work headlights)
at all. The HID headlights generate more light
. The brightness setting is not can- than conventional halogen headlights.
celed even when the ignition switch is Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
turned to the “LOCK” (off) position. may experience too much glare if your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.
The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
matically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
The illumination brightness of the instru-
ment panel dims under the following
conditions.
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” position
. when the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
nate automatically (models with auto on/
off headlights: Refer to “Headlights” F3-
71.)
You can also adjust the illumination bright-
ness for better visibility in the following
ways.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
WARNING
– CONTINUED –
. In freezing weather, be sure that Refer to “Windshield washer over the windshield or rear window.
the wiper blades are not frozen to fluid” F11-29. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
the windshield or rear window Also, when driving the vehicle rial on the windshield or the wiper
before switching on the wipers. when there are freezing tempera- blade results in jerky wiper operation
Attempting to operate the wiper tures, use non-freezing type wi- and streaking on the glass. If you
with the blades frozen to the per blades. cannot remove those streaks after
window glass could cause not operating the washer or if the wiper
only the wiper blades to be . Do not clean the wiper blades operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
damaged but also might cause with gasoline or a solvent, such face of the windshield or rear window
the wiper motor to fail. If the as paint thinner or benzine. This and the wiper blades using a sponge or
wiper blades are frozen to the will cause deterioration of the soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
window glass, be sure to operate wiper blades. mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
the defroster, windshield wiper rinse the window glass and wiper
deicer (if equipped) or rear win- NOTE blades with clean water. The glass is
dow defogger before turning on clean if no beads form on the glass
. The windshield wiper motor is pro- when you rinse with water.
the wiper.
tected against overloads by a circuit . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
. If the wipers stop during opera- breaker. If the motor operates continu-
tion because of ice or some other even after following this procedure,
ously under an unusually heavy load, replace the wiper blades with new
obstruction on the window, this the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
might cause the wiper motor to ones. For replacement instructions,
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
fail even if the wiper switch is your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
turned off. If this occurs, F11-30.
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
promptly stop the vehicle in a mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
safe place, turn the ignition will reset itself, and the wipers will
switch to the “LOCK” (off) posi- again operate normally.
tion and clean the window glass . Clean your wiper blades and win-
to allow proper wiper operation. dow glass periodically with a washer
. Use clean water if windshield solution to prevent streaking, and to
washer fluid is unavailable. In remove accumulations of road salt or
areas where water freezes in road film. Operate the windshield
winter, use SUBARU Windshield washer for at least 1 second so that
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. washer solution will be sprinkled all
& Windshield wiper and washer For a single wipe of the wipers, push the ! Windshield washer
switches lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. ! Wiper intermittent time control
! Windshield wipers 3
– CONTINUED –
NOTE & Rear window wiper and tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit-
washer switch – 5-door tently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed. In this position, when you
move the select lever to the “R” position
(CVT models) or the shift lever to the
reverse position (MT models), the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever/shift lever
from the “R” (reverse) position to another
position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “ ” position. The washer
The windshield washer fluid warning fluid sprays until you release the knob.
light illuminates when the washer fluid : Washer (accompanied by wiper op- To wash the rear window when the rear
level in the tank has dropped to the eration) wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
lower limit. If the warning light illumi- : Continuous downward to the “ ” position. The washer
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the : Intermittent fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind- you release the knob.
: Off
shield washer fluid” F11-29.
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
: eration)
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob
switch to the “ ” position.
With the switch turned to the “ ” posi-
glare from vehicle headlights behind you 3. Press the switch repeatedly until the & Auto-dimming mirror/com-
and automatically dim the mirror to elim- correct zone setting for your location is pass with HomeLink® (if
inate glare and preserve your vision. For displayed. equipped)
this reason, use care not to cover the 4. Releasing the button for 10 seconds
sensors with stickers, or other similar will exit the zone setting mode.
items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an ! Compass calibration
applicator.
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
! Compass zone adjustment window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle. 1) HomeLink® button 1
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and 2) HomeLink® button 2
hold the switch for 9 seconds until a “C” 3) LED
appears in the compass window. 4) HomeLink® button 3
5. Calibrate the compass according to 5) Sensor
step 2 or step 3. 6) Automatic dimming on/off button
Compass calibration zones 7) Compass display button
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration 8) Compass display
zones” map shown above to verify that The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
the compass zone setting is correct for feature which automatically reduces glare
your geographical location. coming from headlights of vehicles behind
2. Press and hold the switch for 6 you. It also contains a built-in compass
seconds until the zone selection comes and HomeLink® wireless control system.
up (a number will be displayed in the . By pressing the automatic dimming on/
mirror compass window). off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator ! Photosensors ! Compass zone adjustment
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward 3
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with Compass calibration zones
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner The mirror has a photosensor attached on
directly on the mirror as that may cause both the front and back sides. During 1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror nighttime driving, these sensors detect zones” map shown above to verify that
housing and damage the mirror. distracting glare from vehicle headlights the compass zone setting is correct for
behind you and automatically dim the your geographical location.
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve 2. Press and hold the compass display
your vision. For this reason, use care not button for 3 seconds until the zone
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other selection comes up (a number will be
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen- displayed in the mirror compass window).
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
3. Press the compass display button
cloth or an applicator.
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
– CONTINUED –
! Compass calibration www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- and objects are out of the way of
3515. the garage door or other device
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali- to prevent potential harm or
Note the following information about this
brated. damage.
system.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8 If your vehicle is equipped with the . Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-
km/h) or less until the display reads a HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it less Control System with a gar-
direction. complies with Part 15 of the Federal age door opener that lacks the
3. You can also calibrate the compass by Communications Commission Rules in safety stop and reverse feature
driving your vehicle on your everyday the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry as required by applicable safety
routine. The compass will be calibrated Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject standards. A garage door opener
once it has tracked a complete circle. to the following two conditions: which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and (1) this device may not cause harmful
reverse, does not meet these
hold the compass display button for 9 interference, and (2) this device must
safety standards. Using a garage
seconds until a “C” appears in the accept any interference received, includ-
door opener without these fea-
compass window. ing interference that may cause undesired
tures increases risk of serious
5. Calibrate the compass according to operation.
injury or death. For more infor-
step 2 or step 3. Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink®
by anyone other than an authorized website at www.homelink.com or
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- service facility could void authorization to call 1-800-355-3515.
tem use this equipment.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are CAUTION
devices such as gate operators, garage registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
door openers, door locks, home lighting trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink®
and security systems. Wireless Control System to operate
WARNING a garage door opener or an entrance
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the gate, unplug the device’s motor
mirror, each of which can be programmed . When programming the from the outlet during programming
for operation of one desired device. For HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- to prevent motor burnout.
details on the device types which can be tem, you may be operating a
operated by this system, consult the garage door opener or other
HomeLink® website at: device. Make sure that people
– CONTINUED –
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly begins to flash slowly (after approximately
and then rapidly after several seconds, 20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
release both buttons. mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ (25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
garage door opener to the outlet. button you wish to program.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans- 3
opener by pressing the programmed mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
HomeLink® button. light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
! Operating the HomeLink® Wire- rapidly, release both buttons.
less Control System
The programming for the previous device
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire- is now erased and the new device can be
1) HomeLink® button 1 less Control System can be used to operated by pressing the HomeLink®
2) HomeLink® button 2 remote-control the devices to which its button.
3) HomeLink® button 3 buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but- ! Erasing HomeLink® button mem-
2. Press and hold the two outer ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat- ory
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button ing that the signal is being transmitted.
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light NOTE
! Programming other devices
begins to flash (after approximately 20 . Performing this procedure erases
seconds). Then release both buttons. To program other devices such as door the memory of all the preprogrammed
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/ locks, home lighting and security systems, buttons simultaneously. The memory
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit- contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com of individual buttons cannot be erased.
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 or call 1-800-355-3515. . It is recommended that upon the
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you ! Reprogramming a single sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
wish to program. HomeLink® button programmed HomeLink® buttons be
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® erased for security purposes.
button. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
the button until step 4 has been com-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
pleted.
until step 6 is complete.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
1) HomeLink® button 1 determine the actual size and dis-
2) HomeLink® button 2 tance of objects that you view in
3) HomeLink® button 3 convex mirror. : Select side to adjust
: Direction control
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons The remote control mirrors operate only
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
light begins to flash (after approximately “ACC” position.
20 seconds). 1. Turn the control switch to the side that
2. Release both buttons. you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
“R” is for the right mirror.
! In case a problem occurs 2. Move the control switch in the direction
If you cannot activate a device using the you want to move the mirror.
corresponding HomeLink® button after 3. Return the control switch to the neutral
programming, contact HomeLink® at position to prevent unintentional opera-
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- tion.
3515 for assistance.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
! Power folding mirror switch (if manually folded slightly forward of the work. This is not a malfunction. Oper-
equipped) regularly unfolded position, when you ate the switch again after waiting for a
turn the ignition switch from the short period of time.
“LOCK” (off) position to the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the outside mirrors may
automatically fold further forward de- 3
pending on the status of the power
folding mirror switch. When this hap-
pens, press the power folding mirror
switch. By doing so, the outside mir-
rors which have been folded to the
furthest forward position will extend to
the regularly unfolded position and
then fold rearward in the usual way. In
order to unfold the outside mirrors,
press the switch again.
The power folding mirror switch operates
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
manually, the mirrors may become
or “ACC” position.
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
To fold the outside mirrors, press the by switch operation. If the outside
power folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
mirrors, press the switch again. again and then unfold them by switch
NOTE operation.
. When the temperature is low, the
. If the outside mirrors have been outside mirrors may stop during switch
operated (folded or unfolded) manually, operation. If that occurs, push the
when you turn the ignition switch from switch again. When the outside mirrors
the “LOCK” (off) position to the “ACC” do not work by switch operation, move
or “ON” position, the outside mirrors them several times manually. This
may be adjusted automatically depend- makes it possible to operate them by
ing on the status of the power folding switch operation.
mirror switch. . When you operate the power folding
. If the outside mirrors have been mirror switch continuously, it may not
windshield wiper blades have been deiced of the rear window. They may Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
completely before that time, press the damage the conductors printed
control switch to turn them off. If defrost- on the window.
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete, WARNING
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again. NOTE . Do not adjust the steering wheel 3
. Turn on the defogger and deicer tilt/telescopic position while driv-
For models with the automatic climate system if the wipers are frozen to the ing. This may cause loss of
control system (type B, C and D), it is windshield. vehicle control and result in
possible for the defogger and deicer . If the windshield is covered with personal injury.
system to be set to continuous operation snow, remove the snow so that the . If the lever cannot be raised to
mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your windshield wiper deicer works effec- the fixed position, adjust the
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for tively. steering wheel again. It is dan-
models with a multi function display, the . While the defogger and deicer sys- gerous to drive without locking
setting can be changed using the display. tem is in the continuous operation the steering wheel. This may
For details, refer to “Multi function display” mode, if the vehicle speed remains at cause loss of vehicle control
F3-28. 9 mph (15 km/h) or less for 15 minutes, and result in personal injury.
If the battery voltage drops below the the windshield wiper deicer automati-
permissible level, continuous operation of cally stops operating, though the rear
the defogger and deicer system is can- window defogger and outside mirror
celed and the system stops operating. defogger maintain continuous opera-
tion in this condition.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface
– CONTINUED –
Horn
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
Climate control
Ventilator control
& Center and side ventilators
Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Center ventilators To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
1) Open To open or close the ventilator, turn the
2) Close thumb-wheel up or down.
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Automatic climate control . when the AUTO mode is selected: 3. To turn off the climate control system,
OFF (outside air) press the “OFF” button. Then the air inlet
operation (type B, C and D)
. when the AUTO mode is not se- selection will be set to OFF (outside air).
lected: the mode that was selected
When this mode is selected, the fan when turning off the climate system & Operation tips
speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control, will be selected.
and air conditioner compressor operation . Operate the automatic climate control
are automatically controlled. To activate system when the engine is running.
this mode, perform the following.
& Type C and D . Even when cooling is not necessary, 4
1. Depress the “AUTO” button. The setting the temperature much lower than
& Type B indicator light “FULL AUTO” on the display the current outlet air temperature turns on
illuminates. the air conditioner compressor automati-
1. Turn the airflow mode selection dial cally and the “A/C” indicator light on the
and fan speed control dial to the “AUTO” 2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial. control panel illuminates.
position.
2. Set the preferred temperature using NOTE
the temperature control dial. . The controllable temperature range
NOTE may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. Each function can be individually . If you operate any of the buttons on
set to the AUTO mode independently of the control panel other than the “OFF”
the other functions. Any function set to button, rear window defogger button
the AUTO mode is controlled automa- and temperature control dial(s) during
tically. Any function not set to the FULL AUTO mode operation, the
AUTO mode can be manually adjusted “FULL” indicator light on the control
as desired. panel will turn off and the “AUTO”
. The controllable temperature range indicator light will remain illuminated.
may vary depending on the regional You can then manually control the
specifications of the vehicle. system as desired using the button
3. To turn off the climate control system, you operated. To change the system
turn the fan speed control dial to the “OFF” back to the FULL AUTO mode, press
position. Then the air inlet selection will be the “AUTO” button.
set as follows.
– CONTINUED –
& Temperature sensors properly and become damaged, the sys- Manual climate control op-
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
eration
the sensors, observe the following pre- & Airflow mode selection
cautions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact. To select the airflow mode:
– Keep water away from the sensors. Type A, B and C: Turn the airflow mode
selection dial.
– Do not cover the sensors.
Type D: Press the airflow mode selection
The sensors are located as follows. button.
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield To select the defrost mode:
defroster grille Type A and B: Turn the airflow mode
– Interior air temperature sensor: next to selection dial.
the steering column Type C and D: Press the defroster button.
– Outside temperature sensor: near the
front bumper opening Airflow modes are as follows.
both side windows to prevent fogging.) and both side outlets of the instrument
panel (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-11.)
ture independently by selecting the fan is in operation to turn on the air WARNING
“DUAL” mode. conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. Continued operation in the ON posi-
You can select the “DUAL” mode by
performing either of the following proce- To turn off the air conditioner, press the tion may fog up the windows. Switch
dures. button again. to the OFF position as soon as the
outside conditions are no longer
. Press the “DUAL” button NOTE dusty.
. Turn the passenger’s side temperature For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
control dial ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient NOTE
The “DUAL” mode can be canceled by
temperature decreases to approxi- . When the indicator light on the air
pressing the “DUAL” button.
mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner inlet selection button is flashing at
When the “DUAL” mode is selected: compressor will stop operating. engine starting, a malfunction might
Turn the driver’s side dial to set the be occurring in the electrical system.
driver’s side temperature. Turn the front & Air inlet selection Contact your SUBARU dealer for in-
passenger’s side dial to set the front spection.
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet . The indicator light on the air inlet
passenger’s side temperature.
selection button. selection button may flash in the
When the “DUAL” mode is canceled: following cases. However, this does
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
Set the desired temperature by turning the recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the not indicate a malfunction.
driver’s side dial. air inlet selection button to the ON position – After the vehicle battery has been
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or disconnected and reconnected.
& Fan speed control when driving on a dusty road. – When the vehicle battery voltage
The fan operates only when the ignition is low.
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
preferred fan speed by turning the fan drawn into the passenger compartment.
speed control dial. Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
& Air conditioner control is no longer dusty.
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
Defrosting selection is automatically set to the Operating tips for heater and
outside air mode.
air conditioner
& Type A and B For type A climate control system, in
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode by turning the this state: & Cleaning ventilation grille
airflow mode selection dial to defrost or – You cannot stop the air condi-
dehumidify the windshield and front door tioner compressor by pressing the
windows. air conditioner button.
– You cannot select the recircula- 4
& Type C tion mode by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the . For type C and D climate control
defroster button, or select the “ ” mode system, after defrosting the windshield
by turning the airflow mode selection dial by pressing the defroster button “ ”,
to defrost or dehumidify the windshield pressing the button again returns the
and front door windows. system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was acti-
& Type D vated.
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the 1) Front ventilation inlet grille
defroster button, or select the “ ” mode
by pressing the airflow mode selection Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille
button to defrost or dehumidify the wind- free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
shield and front door windows. to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
NOTE the radiator, this area should be kept clean
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is because cooling performance is impaired
selected, the air conditioner compres- by any accumulation of insects and leaves
sor operates automatically regardless on the condenser.
of the position of the air conditioner
button to defrost the windshield more & Efficient cooling after parking
quickly. However the indicator on the in direct sunlight
air conditioner button will not illumi- After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
nate. At the same time, the air inlet the windows open for a few minutes to
– CONTINUED –
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning Air filtration system
heated interior. This results in quicker system.
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
Replace the filter element according to the
windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor replacement schedule as follows. This
the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is schedule should be followed to maintain
efficiency. heavily loaded the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, extremely dusty conditions, the filter
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed should be replaced more frequently. It is
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi- recommended that you have your filter
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator checked or replaced by your SUBARU
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid dealer. For replacement, use only a
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade.
Replacement schedule:
& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
system before summer sea- control system km) whichever comes first
son Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper od of adding, changing or checking the CAUTION
operation each spring. Have the air con- refrigerant is different from the method for Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
ditioning system checked by your CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU following occurs, even if it is not yet
SUBARU dealer. dealer for service. Repairs needed as a time to change the filter:
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
& Cooling and dehumidifying in not covered under warranty. . Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions . Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally 3. Replace the air filter element with a
and remove the hinge portion. When new one.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-3 When the following messages are displayed....... 5-20
Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-3 Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-21
FM reception ....................................................... 5-3 Precautions to observe when handling a
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4 compact disc................................................... 5-22
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4 USB storage device / iPod® operations ........... 5-24
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 Play file ............................................................. 5-24
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-24
Power and audio controls .................................. 5-7 Connectable iPod® models................................. 5-24
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7 Connecting USB storage device / iPod® ............. 5-25 5
Sound controls and audio settings ...................... 5-7 How to play back ............................................... 5-26
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-11 To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-26
FM selection ...................................................... 5-11 To select a chapter from the beginning when
AM selection ...................................................... 5-11 connecting iPod® ............................................. 5-26
Tuning ............................................................... 5-11 Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-26
HD RadioTM Technology (Digital AM and FM Repeating .......................................................... 5-26
Radio) (type B audio)........................................ 5-13 Random playback .............................................. 5-27
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and SCAN (only when connecting USB storage
RT (Radio Text) ................................................ 5-14 device) (type A audio) ...................................... 5-28
Station preset .................................................... 5-15 Selecting category (only when connecting
iPod®) ............................................................. 5-28
CD player operation ........................................... 5-16
Display selection ............................................... 5-28
Play file.............................................................. 5-16
Folder selection (only when connecting USB
How to insert a CD ............................................. 5-16 storage device) ................................................ 5-29
How to play back a CD ....................................... 5-17 Setting the playing speed (only when the
To select a track from the beginning ................... 5-17 audiobook is playing) (type B audio) ................ 5-29
Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-17 When the following messages are displayed....... 5-29
Repeating .......................................................... 5-18 Audio control buttons ....................................... 5-30
Random playback .............................................. 5-18 MODE button ..................................................... 5-30
Scan (type A audio)............................................ 5-19 “ ” and “ ” switch .......................................... 5-30
Display selection (type A audio).......................... 5-19 Volume control switch ....................................... 5-31
Folder selection ................................................. 5-20
How to eject a CD from the player ...................... 5-20
Audio
& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-11
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-16
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-21
. USB storage device/iPod® operation: 5
refer to page 5-24
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-31
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-34
– CONTINUED –
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-11
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-16
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-21
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-24
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-31
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-34
Power and audio controls mount speakers can be heard at ! Tone and balance control (type A
ear level (built in SRS FOCUS effect) audio)
& Power switch and volume (type B audio).
control (2) Ultra rich bass sound can be
obtained from standard door mount
speakers (built in SRS TruBass Type A audio
effect) (type B audio).
Type A and B audio . TruBass, FOCUS, SRS and “ ”
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Each brief press of the “TUNE/TRACK/
Inc.
. TruBass and FOCUS technologies
CH” dial will change the control modes in
the following sequence.
5
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)
and volume control. The radio is turned are incorporated under license from
ON and OFF by pressing the dial, and the SRS Labs, Inc.
volume is controlled by turning the dial.
– CONTINUED –
! Other settings (type A audio) ! Audio settings (type B audio) First menu Second menu Third menu
Screen — —
OFF
Type A audio Sound Tone Bass
Mid
NOTE
Only “Screen OFF” can be displayed
while driving.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! Seek tuning (SEEK) ! Scan tuning (SCAN) ! PTY (Program type) group tuning
Type A audio: (only FM reception)
Type A audio*1
Type B audio: Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/ ! Seek in PTY (Program type) & HD RadioTM Technology (Di-
CH” dial. group gital AM and FM Radio) (type
Type A audio: B audio)
Seek up
5
Seek down
– CONTINUED –
For more information, visit www.hdradio. . The “LIVE” indicator illuminates when received in an area where the analog
com. the “Ballgame” is received. signal can be properly received, or the
Press the button while receiving FM . The “STEREO” indicator illuminates system frequently switches the chan-
when an FM stereo broadcast is received. nels between the digital and analog
radio (except an analog broadcast). The signals. However, this does not indi-
next channel of the station that is being . The “PTY” indicator illuminates during
the PTY selection mode. cate a malfunction. If this frequent
received will play. switching between digital and analog
! Mode selection ! About HD Radio causes annoyance, set the radio to the
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial and NOTE analog mode (HD Radio off mode) that
select the HD Radio ON mode (hybrid . HD Radio Technology is a hybrid provides the same radio broadcasting
mode) or OFF mode (analog mode). broadcasting system that employs di- quality as a conventional radio.
! iTunes® tagging gital and analog signals.
To tag the received song, press and hold
. When the vehicle moves outside the & Displaying radio PS (Pro-
digital broadcasting area (that is nar- gram Service Name) and RT
the button. Connect an iPod® to rower than the analog broadcasting
store the tagged song to the iPod®. When (Radio Text)
area due to the FCC output require-
the iPod® is connected to iTunes®, you ments), the radio reception automati-
can purchase the tagged songs from the cally changes from the digital signal to “TEXT” button
Apple® iTunes Music Store. the analog signal. When the vehicle
For the models of iPod® that support reenters the digital broadcasting area,
iTunes® tagging, refer to the following the radio reception automatically ! Type A audio
website: www.hdradio.com/tagging.php? changes from the analog signal to the
id=itunes. If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
digital signal. When in a digital mode
RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
! HD Radio indicators the Logo will be in orange on the
the “TEXT” button will change the display
radio display.
Each indicator illuminates under the fol- among PS, RT and frequency. The default
. Depending on the broadcasting sta-
lowing conditions. setting is “PS”.
tion, a condition such as a sound delay,
. The indicator illuminates while a echo effect or skipping sound may
digital broadcast is received during the HD NOTE
occur. However, this does not indicate . The maximum number of characters
Radio ON mode. a malfunction.
. The “TAG” indicator illuminates when that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. Depending on the broadcasting . The maximum number of characters
you can operate the iTunes® tagging. area, the digital signal may not be that can be displayed for RT is 64.
& How to play back a CD & To select a track from the & Fast-forwarding and rewind-
beginning ing
! When there is no CD inserted
Type A audio:
Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How to
insert a CD” F5-16. “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
When a CD is loaded, the player will start dial
playback of the CD, beginning with the Fast-forward
first track.
! When CD is in the player Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
Each brief press of the button will
wise to skip to the beginning of the next 5
track. Each time the dial is turned, the Rewind
change the modes in the following se- indicated track number will increase.
quence.
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
clockwise to skip to the beginning of the
current track. Each time the dial is turned, Type B audio:
the indicated track number will decrease.
*: For type A audio, “BT-A” is displayed. NOTE Fast-forward
When the CD mode is selected, the player With an MP3, WMA or AAC:
will start playback. . Skipping past the last track will take
you back to the first track in the folder. Rewind
. Skipping past the first track will take
you to the last track in the folder. Press and hold the “ ” button to fast-
forward the track. Release the button to
stop fast-forwarding.
Press and hold the “ ” button to rewind
the track. Release the button to stop
rewinding.
NOTE
. If you fast-forward to the end of the
last track, fast-forwarding will stop and
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
remains displayed, please contact your Auxiliary input jack 2. Press the “CD/AUX” button on the
SUBARU dealer. audio control panel to select the AUX
mode. Refer to “When CD is in the player”
F5-17.
3. Play back the portable audio player.
Refer to the instruction manual for the
portable audio player.
NOTE
. The output sound of the portable 5
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set
may be very low. If you turn up the
volume of the audio set, the volume
You can connect an external audio device becomes louder. However, when you
to the vehicle’s audio system and play change from one portable audio player
back audio via the vehicle’s speakers. to another one, the volume levels via
the vehicle’s speakers may be signifi-
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is present in
cantly louder compared to the prior
the center console. A stereo mini pin plug
device. To avoid a large volume differ-
(3.5ø) can be inserted in this jack. The
ence, turn down the volume when you
connection cable is available at electrical
change between portable audio
appliance or similar stores.
players.
To use the AUX input jack: . In some cases, when the sound
1. Connect a portable audio player to the volume of the portable audio player is
AUX input jack. low, the sound quality may become
impaired when you turn up the volume
of the vehicle audio system. In this
“CD/AUX” button case, adjust the sound volume of the
portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
– CONTINUED –
USB storage device / iPod® source other than the USB power & Connectable iPod® models
supply (for example, an AC power
operations adapter, etc.) cannot be operated.
Model Firmware
& Play file . A USB memory that is connected to version
the memory card reader or multi card with video 1.3
Refer to “Play file” F5-16. reader cannot be operated.
. If the USB memory consists of two classic 2.0.4
& Connectable USB storage
drives or more, the system will recog- nano (1st generation) 1.3.1
device nize only one of the drives after con- nano (2nd generation) 1.1.3
Mass storage class USB memory can be necting the USB memory.
connected. USB storage devices that can . The contents stored on the USB nano (3rd generation) 1.1.3
be played back are accompanied by the memory may not be played in the same nano (4th generation) 1.0.4
following restrictions. order as they appear on a personal iPod®
nano (5th generation) 1.0.2
. Maximum directory layers: 8 layers computer.
(including the ROOT) . A personal computer cannot be nano (6th generation) 1.0
. Maximum number of files in a folder: used even if it is connected to the touch (1st generation) 3.1.3
255 system using a USB cable. touch (2nd generation) 3.1.3
. Maximum number of folders: 512 (type . If the USB memory has a security
function, the contents stored on the touch (3rd generation) 4.1
A audio)/255 (type B audio) (including the
ROOT) USB memory cannot be played by the touch (4th generation) 4.1
. Maximum number of files on the system.
1G 3.1.3
device: 130,560 (type A audio)/2,500 . A USB memory and an iPod® cannot
be connected to the system at the 3G 3.1.3
(type B audio) iPhone®
same time. 3G S 3.1.3
NOTE 4G 4.1
. HUB class USB memory cannot be
played.
. ATAPI subclass USB cannot be CAUTION
played.
. For type A audio, High Speed USB Do not connect an iPod® other than
2.0 cannot be played. the previously stated models. Doing
. A USB memory that is powered by a so may result in a malfunction or
cause the device to experience a
thermal hazard. & Connecting USB storage de- . While an iPod® is connected, the
vice / iPod® iPod® cannot be operated using the
click wheel on the iPod® (except some
NOTE models).
WARNING
. iPod® is a registered trademark of . When using an iPod® by connecting
Apple Inc. Do not operate an iPod ® while it to in-vehicle equipment, the order of
. You are only permitted to personally driving. Doing so may distract your the list items displayed on the in-
copy and play copyright-free material attention from driving and could vehicle equipment may be different
or material that is legally permitted to lead to an accident. from that on the iPod®. However, this
be copied and played by using an does not indicate a malfunction.
iPod® and iTunes. Copyright infringe- . An iPod® battery that is connected 5
ment is prohibited by law. CAUTION to in-vehicle equipment will be charged
. To check the firmware version of an when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
iPod®, connect it to a computer and . If the data stored in an iPod® is or “ACC” position. However, activation
check the device manager. For further deleted while it is connected to of the iPod® may be delayed if the
information, see the User’s Guide for the in-vehicle system, the data battery charge of the iPod® is low.
the iPod®. cannot be recovered. . If an iPod® does not activate after
. To update the firmware version of an . Do not store an iPod® in the operation, disconnect the connection
iPod®, visit the Apple Inc. website. vehicle. If an iPod® is left in the cable from the iPod® and reset it. For
. Depending on the model and firm- vehicle for a long period of time, the resetting procedure, see the User’s
ware version of an iPod®, it may not it may be deformed, discolored Guide of the iPod®.
work properly or not operate at all. or damaged by high temperature. . If an iPod® and the connection cable
are connected improperly, the iPod®
cannot be powered on or will not be
NOTE recognized by in-vehicle equipment. In
. Even if a USB storage device or this case, disconnect the connection
iPod® is connected, it cannot be played cable from the iPod®, and then connect
unless the USB/iPod® mode is se- it again.
lected.
. Movies stored on a USB storage
device or an iPod® cannot be played
while the storage device or iPod® is
connected to the system.
– CONTINUED –
! When connecting iPod® press the “RPT” button. When connecting iPod® (type A audio):
Type A audio
& Random playback
fore, iPod® operation may be different & Selecting category (only Type B audio:
depending on the model of the con- when connecting iPod®)
nected iPod®.
. When an audiobook or a podcast is When the button is pressed briefly,
playing, the mode does not change the iPod® menu will be displayed.
even if you press the “RDM” button. Each time you turn the “TUNE/TRACK/
To cancel the random playback mode, CH” dial clockwise, the displayed category
press the “RDM” button and select CAN- will change in the following sequence.
CEL. The “RDM” indication will turn off, Each time you turn the dial counterclock-
and the normal playback mode will re- wise, the displayed category will change in
sume. the opposite sequence.
Type A audio:
& SCAN (only when connecting To select the category, press the dial. To
USB storage device) (type A close the iPod® menu, press and hold the
audio) button. To return to the previous
screen, briefly press the button.
Audio control buttons & MODE button ! Models with Hands-free system
Press and hold this button if you wish to
immediately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press and hold the button again, the
original sound volume will return and
“MUTE” turns off.
NOTE
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
This function enables you to play back
audio sources from Bluetooth® audio
devices. You need to register the Blue-
tooth® audio device in the system before
using it.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
indication will change in the following Hands-free system (if equipment when the ignition switch is
sequence. turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position while
equipped) carrying the cell phone.
NOTE When two cell phones or more are
. For models with the genuine already registered:
SUBARU navigation system, refer to If the system detects a cell phone in the
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the passenger compartment which was pre-
! Folder selection navigation system. viously connected to the in-vehicle equip-
Select a folder in the same way as for a . When selling your vehicle, make ment when the ignition switch was last
CD. Refer to “Folder selection” F5-20. sure that you initialize the Hands-free turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position, the
system to prevent personal data from system connects the cell phone automa-
being improperly accessed. tically to the in-vehicle equipment. You
The Hands-free system operates while the can select the phone to be connected to
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” the in-vehicle equipment. For details, refer
position. to “Selecting a cell phone” F5-46.
You can use your cell phone without After connecting a cell phone, you can use
touching it by using the Hands-free sys- the following functions.
tem. To use the Hands-free system,
connect a cell phone as follows. Function Page
– CONTINUED –
& Using the Hands-free system ! Menu list of the Hands-free system
(when not using the voice com-
! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode mand system)
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history 5-49
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-51
GO BACK —
CALLBACK DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-47
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history 5-49
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-51
GO BACK —
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
– CONTINUED –
*1: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
*2: Up to 5 cell phones can be registered.
– CONTINUED –
The commands available for the voice command system are listed in the following chart.
English:
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
Phone book* Add entry By voice Adding a new number by voice 5-48
By phone Adding a new number by cell phone 5-48
Call history Adding a new number from call history 5-49
Go back
List names Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-50
Change name Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-50
Set speed dial Registering a speed dial 5-50
Delete entry Deleting phonebook data 5-50
Delete speed dial Deleting a registered speed dial 5-51
Go back
Redial Dial Redialing 5-47
Store Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-49
Delete Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-51
Go back
Callback Dial Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-47
Store Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-49
Delete Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-51
Go back
*1: If a PIN code is not registered, you cannot use these commands.
*2: Up to 5 cell phones can be registered.
*3: Select the “Phone book” menu then select the “Add entry” menu. Only after then selecting the “Call history” menu will these menus become available
for use.
– CONTINUED –
Français:
Premier menu Deuxième menu Troisième menu Détails Page
Registre* Ajouter l’entrée Vocalement Ajout d’un nouveau numéro par la voix 5-48
Par téléphone Ajout d’un nouveau numéro par le téléphone cellulaire 5-48
Historique d’appels Ajout d’un nouveau numéro à partir de l’historique des appels 5-49
Retourner
Lister les noms Affichage de la liste des noms enregistrés dans le répertoire 5-50
Modifier le nom Changement du nom enregistré dans le répertoire 5-50
Configurer composition abrégée Enregistrement d’un appel rapide 5-50
Supprimer l’entrée Effacement de données du répertoire 5-50
Supprimer composition abrégée Effacement d’une composition rapide enregistrée 5-51
Retourner
Recomposer Composer Rappel du dernier numéro 5-47
Enregistrer Ajout d’un nouveau numéro enregistré dans la mémoire des 5-49
historiques des appels sortants
Enregistrer Ajout d’un nouveau numéro enregistré dans la mémoire des 5-49
historiques des appels entrants
*: Si un téléphone cellulaire n’est pas enregistré, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette commande.
*1: Si un code PIN n’est pas enregistré, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces commandes.
*2: Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu’à 5 téléphones.
*3: Vous ne pouvez sélectionner ces menus qu’après avoir sélectionné, dans l’ordre, les menus “Registre”, “Ajouter l’entrée” puis “Historique d’appels”.
– CONTINUED –
The other commands available for the voice command system are listed in the following chart.
Command
Details
English Français
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro) —
2 1 (one) 1 (un) —
3 2 (two) 2 (deux) —
4 3 (three) 3 (trois) —
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre) —
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq) —
7 6 (six) 6 (six) —
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept) —
9 8 (eight) 8 (huit) —
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf) —
11 * (star) * (étoile) —
12 # (pound) # (carré, dièse) —
13 + (plus) + (plus) —
14 cancel annuler Turning off the Hands-free system
15 help aide Listening to the help guidance
16 repeat répéter Repeat the help guidance that you listened to before speaking the “repeat”
command.
17 mute sourdine Cutting the volume to zero
18 previous précédent
19 confirm confirmer
20 PHONE BOOK add entry ajouter l’entrée dans le re- Adding a new number
gistre
Command
Details
English Français
21 PHONE BOOK change modifier le nom dans le Changing a name registered in the phonebook
name registre
23 PHONE BOOK list names lister les noms du registre Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook
PHONE BOOK set speed configurer composition
24 dial abrégée pour le registre Registering a speed dial 5
25 PHONE BOOK delete supprimer composition Deleting a registered speed dial
speed dial abrégée pour le registre
– CONTINUED –
! Preparation for using the Hands- – “PASS KEY: ****” (type B audio) audio) is displayed, a pass key will
free system be displayed.
NOTE 7. Input the displayed pass key into the
! When no cell phones are regis- cell phone while the following message is
tered . If you input the correct pass key,
“PAIRED” will be displayed and the displayed.
Before using the Hands-free system, it is registration procedure will be finished. – “PKY: ****” (type A audio)
necessary to register a cell phone in the
. If you input an incorrect pass key, – “PASS KEY: ****” (type B audio)
system. Perform the following procedure
“FAILED” will be displayed and the
to register a cell phone.
registration procedure will not be suc- NOTE
1. Press the OFF hook switch . cessful. . If you input the correct pass key,
2. Select “ENGLISH”/“FRANÇAIS” by . Up to 5 cell phones can be regis- “PAIRED” will be displayed and the
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. tered. registration procedure will be finished.
– “WELCOME!” will be displayed. . If you input an incorrect pass key,
! Registering a cell phone
3. Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or “FAILED” will be displayed and the
the talk switch . To register a cell phone to the in-vehicle registration procedure will not be suc-
equipment, perform the following proce- cessful.
4. Perform either of the following proce- dure.
dures. . Up to 5 cell phones can be regis-
– Select the “RECORD NAME” 1. Select the “SETUP” menu. tered.
menu. 2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu. ! Selecting a cell phone
– Press the talk switch . 3. Select the “PAIR PHONE” menu. To select the registered cell phone for
5. Say the name (voice tag) to be 4. Perform either of the following proce- connecting to the in-vehicle equipment,
registered. dures. perform the following procedure.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. – Select the “RECORD NAME”
– After “CAR M_MEDIA” (type A menu. 1. Select the “SETUP” menu.
audio)/“CAR MULTIMEDIA” (type B – Press the talk switch . 2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu.
audio) is displayed, a pass key will 5. Say the name (voice tag) to be 3. Select the “SELECT PHONE” menu.
be displayed. registered. – If no cell phones are registered,
7. Input the displayed pass key into the 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. “EMPTY” will be displayed and the
cell phone while the following message is – After “CAR M_MEDIA” (type A mode will change to the “PHONE
displayed. audio)/“CAR MULTIMEDIA” (type B SETUP” mode.
– “PKY: ****” (type A audio)
4. Select the cell phone by performing ! Making a phone call by saying 2. Press the OFF hook switch .
either of the following procedures. number 3. Select the preferred number by turning
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
dial. 4. Perform either of the following proce-
– Press the talk switch and say 2. Press the talk switch .
dures.
3. Say “DIAL BY NUMBER”.
the voice tag. – Press the OFF hook switch .
5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 4. Press the talk switch again. – Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial,
– “SELECTED” will be displayed, the 5. Say the preferred phone number to be then select the “DIAL” menu.
selected cell phone will be connected called.
to the in-vehicle equipment and the 6. Select the “DIAL” menu. ! Callback 5
mode will change to the “PHONE 1. Select the “CALL BACK” menu.
SETUP” mode. ! Making a phone call from speed
2. Press the OFF hook switch .
– If the selected cell phone cannot be dial
connected, “FAILED” will be displayed 3. Select the preferred number by turning
It is possible to select a phone number the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
and the mode will change to the from speed dial registered with the in-
“PHONE SETUP” mode. vehicle equipment to make a phone call. 4. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
! Making a phone call 1. Select the top menu (phone menu). – Press the OFF hook switch .
2. Press the preset button (from to – Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial,
! Making a phone call by saying ) to which the preferred number is then select the “DIAL” menu.
name registered.
1. Select the top menu (phone menu). 3. Press the OFF hook switch . ! Making a phone call from list
2. Press the talk switch . name
3. Say “DIAL BY NAME”. NOTE It is possible to select a phone number
4. Press the talk switch again. from the list name registered with the in-
When a preset button for which num-
vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
5. Say the preferred name (voice tag) to bers are not registered is pressed, an
For details, refer to “List names function”
be called. error message will be shown on the
F5-50.
6. Select the “DIAL” menu. audio screen.
! Top redial
! Redial
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu. 2. Press the OFF hook switch and
– CONTINUED –
load the outgoing call history. voice volume and the voice guidance registered.
3. Select the “DIAL” menu. volume. Refer to “Volume control switch” 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
F5-31. – Then “STORED” will be displayed
! Taking a phone call and declining ! Adjustable level of each volume and the mode will change to the
an incoming call registering speed dial mode. Refer to
To take a phone call: Press the OFF Volume Range Initial setting
“Registering speed dial” F5-49.
hook switch .
Phone call 0 to 14 7 ! Registering by phone
To put an incoming call on hold (only if
the cell phone has this function): Press the
Voice 0 to 14 7 1. Select the “BY PHONE” menu.
ON hook switch briefly. Voice guidance 0 to 6 3 2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– Then “TRANSFER” will be dis-
To decline an incoming call (only if the ! Registering phonebook data played.
cell phone has this function): Press and 3. Transfer the data from the cell phone.
hold the ON hook switch . NOTE
For details about transferring the data,
The maximum number of phonebook
! Ending a call refer to the instruction manual of the cell
entries that can be registered in the
Press the ON hook switch . phone.
phonebook is 50.
4. Perform either of the following proce-
! Volume control
! Registering by voice dures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
1. Select the “BY VOICE” menu.
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
2. Press the talk switch . dial.
3. Say the phone number to be regis- – Press the talk switch .
tered. 5. Say the name (voice tag) to be
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. registered.
5. Perform either of the following proce- 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
dures. – Then “STORED” will be displayed
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu and the mode will change to the
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” registering speed dial mode. Refer to
dial. “Registering speed dial” F5-49.
– Press the talk switch .
You can adjust the phone call volume, the 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
– CONTINUED –
2. Press the preset button (from to (voice tag) from the phonebook 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
) to which you want to register the . “GO BACK” to go back to the menu – Then “CHANGED” will be dis-
phone number. mode played.
and the selected phonebook data will – Then “DELETED” will be displayed ! Locking the phonebook
be deleted. and the selected callback data will be
deleted. CAUTION
! Deleting the speed dial
1. Select the “DEL SPD DIAL”/“DELETE & Bluetooth setting
®
After locking the phonebook, you
SPEED DIAL” menu. cannot unlock the phonebook with-
! Security setting out inputting the PIN code. Do not
2. Press the preset button (from to
) to which you want to delete the After selecting the “SECURITY” menu, forget the PIN code after locking the
speed dial. perform the following procedures. phonebook.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. ! Setting PIN code 5
– Then “DELETED” will be displayed 1. Select the “PHBK LOCK”/“PHONE-
The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is BOOK LOCK” menu.
and the selected speed dial will be used when locking the phonebook.
deleted. – Then “CURRENT PIN?” will be
1. Select the “SET PIN” menu. displayed.
! Deleting the redial data – Then “CURRENT PIN?” will be 2. Input the PIN code by performing
displayed. either of the following procedures.
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
2. Input the current PIN code by perform- – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
2. Select the phone number by operating dial.
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. ing either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” – Press the talk switch and say
3. Select the “DELETE” menu. the number.
dial.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. – Press the talk switch and say 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– Then “DELETED” will be displayed the number. – If the inputted PIN code is correct,
and the selected redial data will be “LOCKED” will be displayed and the
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
deleted. phonebook will be locked.
4. Input the new PIN code by performing
! Deleting the callback data either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” NOTE
1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu. dial. While the phonebook is locked, if the
2. Select the phone number by operating – Press the talk switch and say operation restricted menu is selected,
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. the number. “PHBK LOCK” will be displayed.
3. Select the “DELETE” menu. 5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– CONTINUED –
! Unlocking the phonebook “UNLOCKED” will be displayed and ! List phones function
the phonebook will be unlocked.
The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell
NOTE phone list are spoken by using the list
If you have forgotten your PIN code ! Phone setup
phones function.
and/or are somehow unable to unlock After selecting the “PHONE SETUP”
the phonebook, the phonebook lock menu, perform the following procedures. 1. Select the “LIST PHONES” menu.
can be released by initializing the – If no cell phones are registered,
! Setting pair phone “EMPTY” will be displayed and the
registered data and re-setting the PIN
code. However, initializing the data will Refer to “Registering a cell phone” F5-46. mode will change to the “PHONE
cause all data registered in the hands- SETUP” mode.
! Selecting phone
free system, such as the registration 2. Registered cell phones are displayed
devices and phonebook data, to be Refer to “Selecting a cell phone” F5-46. in the saved order. While displayed, if the
erased. For initialization, refer to “In- ! Changing the voice tag of the cell “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial is turned, the
itializing the registered data” F5-53. phone next registered cell phone will be dis-
played. Press the ON hook button to
1. Select the “PHBK UNLOCK”/“PHONE- 1. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu. close the Hands-free menu.
BOOK UNLOCK” menu. – If no cell phones are registered, 3. Select a cell phone by performing
– Then “CURRENT PIN?” will be “EMPTY” will be displayed and the either of the following procedures.
displayed. mode will change to the “PHONE – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
SETUP” mode. dial.
NOTE 2. Select the cell phone by performing
If the phonebook is not locked, “UN- – Press the talk switch .
either of the following procedures.
LOCK” will be displayed and the mode 4. After “SELECTED” is displayed, you
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” can select the following menus.
will change to the security mode. dial.
2. Input the PIN code by performing – Press the talk switch and say . “SELECT PHONE” to connect the
either of the following procedures. the voice tag. selected cell phone
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” 3. Register the voice tag. For details, . “CHANGE NAME” to change the voice
dial. refer to “Preparation for using the Hands- tag
– Press the talk switch and say free system” F5-46. . “DELETE” to delete the selected cell
the number. phone from the list
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. . “GO BACK” to go back to the “PHONE
– If the inputted PIN code is correct, SETUP” mode
or in the glove box. voice and vice versa. This is normal. ! Corresponding profiles for the cell
– A metal material covers or . The receiver sound volume should phone
touches the cell phone. be set as low as possible. Otherwise, . HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0
. Depending on the type of cell phone the party you are calling may notice an
. OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1
that is used, the screen on the cell undesirable echo sound.
phone may remain illuminated while . Speak clearly and loudly.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” . Your voice may be difficult to be & Certification for the Hands-
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi- heard by the party under the following free system
nation off by adjusting the cell phone conditions.
settings. – Driving on a rough road CAUTION
. Depending on the setting of the cell – Driving at a high speed
FCC WARNING
phone, the dial lock function may be – Driving with a window open
activated after making a call. Deacti- – When air from the ventilator Changes or modifications not ex-
vate the automatic dial lock function of blows directly towards the micro- pressly approved by the party re-
the cell phone before using the Hands- phone sponsible for compliance could void
free system. the user’s authority to operate the
– When the sound coming from the
. Depending on the type of cell phone ventilator is loud
equipment.
that is used, operation and the sound – When the cell phone is too close
volume may be different from those of to the microphone
cell phones currently used. NOTE
. The sound quality may degrade due This device complies with Part 15 of
. When the ignition switch is turned to to the influence of the cell phone that is
the “LOCK” (off) position during a call, the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
connected to the system or the circum- Rules. Operation is subject to the
the call may be disconnected or con- stances of the Bluetooth network.
tinued on the cell phone depending on following two conditions: (1) this de-
. When another Bluetooth® device is vice may not cause harmful interfer-
the type of cell phone that is used. Note simultaneously connected, noise may
that operation of the cell phone may be ence, and (2) this device must accept
be heard in the voice coming from the any interference received, including
necessary if the call is continued on the hands-free phone.
cell phone. interference that may cause undesired
. Do not speak at the same time as the operation.
other party during a call. If you and the
party speak at the same time, it may be
difficult for the other party to hear your
– CONTINUED –
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (11,1)
Interior equipment
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following 1) DOOR
positions. 2) OFF
ON: The light remains on continuously. DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
OFF: The light remains off. nated for several seconds and gradually
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- turns off after the rear gate is closed.
matically in the following cases. OFF: The light remains off.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate (5-
door) is opened.
. The doors or the rear gate (5-door) are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK” (off) posi-
& Map lights NOTE and then gradually turn off under the
For the type A map lights, although the following conditions.
light switches are in the ON position, . after all doors and the rear gate (5-
the lights are automatically turned off door) are closed (dome light)
after approximately 30 seconds of . after all doors are closed (type A map
illumination to prevent the vehicle light)
battery from discharging. For details,
refer to “Battery drainage prevention While the lights are illuminated, if any of
function” F2-5. the following operations are performed,
the lights turn off immediately.
! Automatic illumination (models . The ignition switch is turned from the
with moonroof) “LOCK” (off) position to the “ACC” or “ON”
The map lights illuminate automatically in position. 6
the following cases. . All doors and the rear gate (5-door) are
Type A . Any of the doors other than the rear locked using the remote keyless entry
gate is opened. (The map lights do not system.
illuminate when only the rear gate is
The setting for the period of time in which
opened.)
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
. The doors are unlocked using the be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
remote keyless entry transmitter. tact your SUBARU dealer for details. For
. The ignition switch is turned from the models with multi function display, the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK” (off) posi- setting can be changed by operating the
tion. multi function display. For details, refer to
“Interior light off delay timer setting” F3-
& OFF delay timer 66.
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
Type B . dome light
. map light (type A)
To turn on the map light, push the switch.
To turn it off, push the switch again. After being illuminated automatically,
these lights remain on for several seconds
6
For some models, the armrest is adjus-
1) Lock table. Slide the armrest to the desired
2) Unlock position.
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To 1) Paper holder
close it, push the lid firmly upward. 2) Pen holder
3) Card holder
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
The top of the console can be used as an
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
armrest.
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
CAUTION CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup . Do not pick up a bottle from the
holder or put a cup in the holder bottle holder or put a bottle in the
while you are driving, as this may holder while you are driving, as
distract you and lead to an this may distract you and lead to
accident. an accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev- . When placing a beverage in a
erages, if hot, might scald you bottle holder, make sure it is
and/or your passengers. Spilled capped. Otherwise, the beverage
beverages may also damage up- Front passenger’s cup holder could spill when opening/closing
holstery or carpets. A dual cup holder is built into the center the door or while driving and, if
. When a cup in the rear passen- console. the beverage is hot, it could scald
ger’s cup holder contains a bev- you and/or your passengers.
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles Accessory power outlets below the climate control dials and in the
and other items. center console. Electrical power (12V DC)
from the battery is available at any of the
outlets when the ignition switch is in either
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
outlets simultaneously, the total power
6
consumed by them must not exceed
120W.
Power outlet below the climate control
dials CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not
in use.
Power outlet in the center console . Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
Accessory power outlets are provided The maximum power rating of an
– CONTINUED –
appliance that can be connected do, do not use the electrical . The electrical power socket is
is 120W. Do not use an appliance appliance while driving. originally designed to use a gen-
which exceeds the indicated wat- uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
tage for each outlet. plug. Do not use a non-genuine
When using appliances con- & Use with a cigarette lighter (if cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
nected to two outlets simulta- equipped) et. Doing so may cause a short-
neously, the total power con- To use the accessory power outlet as a circuit and overheating, resulting
sumed by them must not exceed cigarette lighter socket, purchase the in a fire.
120W. Overloading the accessory cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional . If the socket is ever used for a
power outlet can cause a short accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is plug-in accessory such as a cell
circuit. Do not use double adap- available from your SUBARU dealer. phone, that may damage the
ters or more than one electrical The cigarette lighter operates only when portion of the socket’s internal
appliance. the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” mechanism that causes a cigar-
. If the plug on your electric appli- position. ette lighter plug to “pop out”
ance is either too loose or too To use the cigarette lighter, push in the after its lighter element is heated.
tight for the accessory power knob and wait a few moments. It will Therefore, do not place a cigar-
outlet, this can result in a poor automatically spring up when ready for ette lighter plug in a socket that
contact or cause the plug to get use. has been used, even once, to
stuck. Only use plugs that fit power a plug-in accessory. Doing
properly. WARNING so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential
. Use of an electric appliance in the fire hazard.
To avoid being burned, never grasp
accessory power outlet for a long
the lighter by the end with the
period of time while the engine is
heating element. Doing so could
not running can cause battery
result in injury and could also
discharge.
damage the heating element.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will CAUTION
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accel- . Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
erator and brake pedals. If they because it will overheat.
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep 6
the ashtray open, the fire of the The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette may spread to another each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
cigarette butt and start a fire. locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
. Do not put flammable material in holders” F6-6. For the locations of the CAUTION
the ashtray. bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6-
6. If the floor mat slips forward and
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray. interferes with the movement of the
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
an accident. Observe the following
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE precautions to prevent the floor mat
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu- from slipping forward.
mulate around the hinges of the ash- . Be sure to use a genuine
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended lent designed with grommets in
implement. the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
& To remove the cover housing & Stowage of the cargo area 2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
cover area end.
1. Rewind the cover.
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
& To install the cover housing Cargo tie-down hooks Under-floor storage compart-
1. Shorten the cover housing. (5-door – if equipped) ment (if equipped)
CAUTION NOTE
. The shape of the storage compart-
The cargo tie-down hooks are de- ment may be different depending on
signed only for securing light cargo. the model.
Never try to secure cargo that . When storing a flat tire, put the
exceeds the capacity of the hooks. storage tray in the trunk.
The maximum load capacity is 22
lbs (10 kg) per hook.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION Rear view camera (if the monitor is different from the
equipped) actual view in terms of distance.
. Always keep the lids closed while . Since the range of the image on
driving to reduce the risk of the monitor is limited, you should
injury in the event of a sudden always check the rear view and
stop or an accident. the surrounding area with your
. Do not store spray cans, contain- eyes and mirrors, and move
ers with flammable or corrosive backward at a slow speed. Mov-
liquids or any other dangerous ing backward only by checking
items in the storage compart- the rear view image from the
ment. camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
A rear view camera is attached to the Contact your SUBARU dealer
trunk lid or rear gate. When the ignition for an inspection. Continued use
switch is “ON” and the shift lever (MT may result in accident, fire or
models) or select lever (CVT models) is electric shock.
set to “R”, the rear view camera auto-
matically displays the rear view image
behind the vehicle on one of the following CAUTION
displays.
. If your vehicle is washed with a
. Navigation display (if equipped) high-pressure washer, do not
. Multi function display (if equipped) allow water to contact the camera
. Type B audio display (if equipped) directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in con-
WARNING densation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on . Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong cloth moistened with a diluted neutral & How to use the rear view
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, detergent and then wipe it with a soft, camera
fire or electric shock may occur. dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful When the shift lever/select lever is set to
. If mud or snow sticks to or is “R”, the rear view camera automatically
frozen on the camera, you must not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera, displays the rear view image from the
be very careful when removing it. vehicle. When the lever is set to other
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
Otherwise, damage to the camera
neutral detergent to remove the wax. positions, the image before setting to “R”
may cause a fire or electric is displayed.
shock. Pour water or lukewarm . The camera lens has a hard coating
to help prevent scratches. However, 1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
water over the camera to remove 2. Set the shift lever/select lever to “R”.
mud and ice, and wipe it with a when washing the vehicle or cleaning
the camera lens, be careful not to
soft, dry cloth.
scratch the camera lens. Do not use a NOTE 6
. Do not put a flame close to the washing brush directly on the camera
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da- . For models with the genuine
lens. The image quality of the rear view SUBARU navigation system, the image
mage or fire may occur. camera may deteriorate. of the rear view camera has priority
. When replacing the fuse, be sure . Strong light shined on the camera over other screen displays. However,
to use a fuse with the specified lens may develop vertical lines around while the navigation system is acti-
rating. Use of a fuse with a the light source. This is not a malfunc- vated, the image of the rear view
different rating may result in a tion. camera is not displayed.
malfunction. . Under fluorescent light, the display . The image of the rear view camera is
. If the rear view camera is used for may flicker. However, this is not a horizontally reversed as is the case
a long time while the engine is malfunction. with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
not operated, the battery may . The image of the rear view camera side view mirror.
become completely discharged. may be slightly different from the . It may be difficult to see the image of
actual color of the objects. the rear view camera in the following
. For models with both the multi cases. This is not a malfunction of the
NOTE function display and type B audio, the camera.
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol, rear view image is displayed on the
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, type B audio display.
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
discoloration may occur. To remove – The vehicle is in an extremely hot
contamination, wipe the camera with a or cold place.
– CONTINUED –
– An object (such as raindrops, Also, the image from the rear view camera
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the looks shorter than the actual distance.
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
wide projection on its upper part such as a the help lines together with the rear view ! When there is an upward slope at
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec- image. the back
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
& Help line
. When moving backward, always
The help line (distance marker and vehicle check the back with your eyes
width line) is a guide to help you realize without relying on the help lines.
the actual distance from the screen image.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded 6
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined 1) 3 feet (1 m)
against the road, the indication The distance on the screen looks farther
is different from the actual posi- than the actual distance.
tion.
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
1) 3 feet (1 m) 2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance. The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
NOTE close behind, distance cannot be correctly
When cargo is loaded, the rear view displayed.
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
Cruise control (if equipped)............................... 7-39 To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-41
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-39 Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-42
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-40 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-42
To turn off the cruise control .............................. 7-41
Fuel nozzle. Under no circumstances should system performance may deteriorate and
leaded gasoline be used because it will the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
damage the emission control system and function indicator light may turn on. If this
CAUTION may impair driveability and fuel economy. happens, return to your authorized
! Gasoline for California-certified SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
Use of a fuel which is low in quality LEV determined that the condition is caused
or use of an inappropriate fuel by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
If your vehicle was certified to California’s be covered by your warranty.
additive may cause engine damage.
low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
indicated on the underhood tune-up label, ! Gasoline for cleaner air
& Fuel requirements it is designed to optimize engine and Your use of gasoline with detergent
emission performance with gasoline that additives will help prevent deposits from
The engine is designed to operate using meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali- forming in your engine and fuel system.
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in This helps keep your engine in tune and
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. any other state than California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
7
! Fuel octane rating
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out- for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
This octane rating is the average of the
side California is permitted to have higher high quality fuel with the proper detergent
Research Octane and Motor Octane
sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor- and other additives, you should never
numbers and is commonly referred to as
mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter need to add any fuel system cleaning
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or agents to your fuel tank.
Using a gasoline with a lower octane smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
rating can cause persistent and heavy a different brand of unleaded gasoline Many gasolines are now blended with
knocking, which can damage the engine. having lower sulfur to determine if the materials called oxygenates. Use of these
Do not be concerned if your vehicle problem is fuel related before returning fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive your vehicle to an authorized dealer for Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact service. (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
the specified octane rating and your ! MMT your vehicle, but should contain no more
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently. Some gasoline contains an octane-en- than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
! Unleaded gasoline hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- proper operation of your SUBARU.
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed Do not use any gasoline that contains
you use such fuels, your emission control
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler more than 10% ethanol, including from
– CONTINUED –
any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 . If undesirable driveability problems are & Fuel filler lid and cap
(which are only some examples of fuel experienced and you suspect they may be
containing more than 10% ethanol). fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- ! Locations of the fuel filler lid and
line before seeking service at your the lid release lever
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle . Fuel system damage or driveability
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of
reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station CAUTION
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- surfaces of the vehicle. Because
sions. fuel may damage the paint, be sure
to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
As additional guidance, only use fuels Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
suited for your vehicle as explained in the is not covered under the SUBARU Fuel filler lid
following description. Limited Warranty. 1) 4-door models
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an 2) 5-door models
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
whenever the low fuel warning State emission testing (U.S. have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
light illuminates. Engine misfires inspect your vehicle’s emission control
only) system. If your vehicle does not pass this
as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the en- test, some states may deny renewal of
gine. WARNING your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model that monitors the performance of the
must NEVER be performed on a engine’s emission control system. Certi-
single two-wheel dynamometer. At- fied emission inspectors will inspect the
tempting to do so will result in On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
uncontrolled vehicle movement and part of the state emission inspection
may cause an accident or injuries to process. The OBDII system is designed
persons nearby. to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
7
CAUTION inspections apply to all 1996 model year
. At state inspection time, remem- and newer passenger cars and trucks.
ber to tell your inspection or Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
service station in advance not to bia have implemented emission inspec-
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle tion of the OBDII system.
on a two-wheel dynamometer. . The inspection of the OBDII system
Otherwise, serious transmission consists of a visual operational check of
damage will result. the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an
. Resultant vehicle damage due to examination of the OBDII system with an
improper testing is not covered electronic scan tool.
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of . A vehicle passes the OBDII system
the state inspection program or inspection if proper operation of the
its contractors or licensees. “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
California and a number of federal states trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
– CONTINUED –
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if The U.S. Environmental Protection Preparing to drive
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
properly operating (light is illuminated or is dynamometers in their emission testing
You should perform the following checks
not working due to a burned out bulb) or program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
and adjustments every day before you
there is one or more diagnostic trouble AWD vehicles from the portion of the
start driving.
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer. testing program that involves a two-wheel
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
. A state emission inspection may reject dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their lights are clean and unobstructed.
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT testing program. When properly used, this 2. Check the appearance and condition
READY” is greater than one. If the equipment should not damage a SUBARU of the tires. Also check tires for proper
vehicle’s battery has been recently re- AWD vehicle. inflation.
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
Under no circumstances should the rear leaks.
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
not ready for the emission test. Under this 4. Check that the hood, trunk (4-door)
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
condition, the vehicle driver should be and rear gate (5-door) are fully closed.
state emission testing.
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few 5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
days to reset the readiness monitors and 6. Check the adjustment of the inside
return for an emission re-inspection. and outside mirrors.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
service. 8. Check the operation of the warning
Some states still use dynamometers in and indicator lights when the ignition
their emission inspection program. A switch is turned to the “ON” position.
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
testing device that allows your vehicle’s ing lights after starting the engine.
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put NOTE
on a dynamometer, tell your emission Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
inspector not to place your SUBARU washer fluid and other fluid levels
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- should be checked daily, weekly or at
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- fuel stops.
sion damage will result.
Starting and stopping the & Starting engine . When starting the engine, be sure
engine to sit in the driver’s seat (except
! General precautions when starting when using the remote engine
engine start system).
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not operate the starter motor
NOTE
. Never start the engine from out- . Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
continuously for more than 10 sec- side the vehicle (except when
onds. If the engine fails to start after eration immediately after the engine
using the remote engine start has started.
operating the starter for 5 to 10 system). It may result in an
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or . For a short time after the engine has
accident. started, the engine speed is kept high.
more before trying again.
. Do not leave the engine running When the warm-up is completed, the
in locations with poor ventilation, engine speed lowers automatically.
NOTE such as a garage and indoors. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult 7
It may be difficult to start the engine The exhaust gas may enter the to start the engine depending on the
when the battery has been discon- vehicle or indoors, and it may fuel and the usage condition (repeated
nected and reconnected (for mainte- result in carbon monoxide poi- driving of a distance in which the
nance or other purposes). This diffi- soning. engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
culty is caused by the electronically . Do not start the engine near dry In such a case, it is recommended that
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis foliage, paper, or other flam- you change to a different brand of fuel.
function. To overcome it, keep the mable substances. The exhaust . On rare occasions, transient knock-
ignition switch in the “ON” position pipe and exhaust emissions can ing may be heard from the engine when
for approximately 10 seconds before create a fire hazard at high the accelerator is operated rapidly
starting the engine. temperatures. such as a rapid start-up and a rapid
acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
CAUTION the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. If the engine is stopped during . After the engine starts, the engine
driving, the catalyst may over- speed will be kept high until the engine
heat and burn. has warmed up sufficiently.
– CONTINUED –
! MT models the ignition switch back to the “LOCK” position and check the operation of the
1. Apply the parking brake. (off) position and wait for at least 10 warning and indicator lights. Refer to
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- seconds. Then fully depress the accel- “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9.
cessories. erator pedal and turn the ignition 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor switch to the “START” position. If the position without depressing the accelera-
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold engine starts, quickly release the tor pedal. Release the key immediately
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting accelerator pedal. after the engine has started.
the engine. (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK” If the engine does not start, try the
The starter motor will only operate when following.
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the (off) position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
floor. “LOCK” (off) position and wait for at
switch to the “START” position without
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” least 10 seconds. After checking that
depressing the accelerator pedal.
position and check the operation of the the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ignition switch to the “START” position
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. while depressing the accelerator pedal
for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” slightly (approximately a quarter of the
position without depressing the accelera- 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
full stroke). Release the accelerator
tor pedal. Release the key immediately lights have turned off after the engine has
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
after the engine has started. started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up. the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
following. (off) position and wait for at least 10
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the ! CVT models seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
“LOCK” (off) position and wait for at erator pedal and turn the ignition
least 10 seconds. After checking that 1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the “START” position. If the
the parking brake is firmly set, turn the 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- engine starts, quickly release the
ignition switch to the “START” position cessories. accelerator pedal.
while depressing the accelerator pedal 3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
slightly (approximately a quarter of the position (preferably the “P” position). the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
full stroke). Release the accelerator The starter motor will only operate when (off) position. After waiting for 10
pedal as soon as the engine starts. the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position. seconds or longer, turn the ignition
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, and the brake booster, making steer- Remote engine start system
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ing and braking more difficult. It
for assistance.
(dealer option)
could also result in accidental acti-
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator vation of the “LOCK” (off) position
lights have turned off after the engine has on the ignition switch, causing the WARNING
started. The fuel injection system auto- steering wheel to lock.
matically lowers the idle speed as the . There are some general precau-
engine warms up. tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
While the engine is warming up, make described in “General precau-
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or tions when starting engine” F7-
“N” position and that the parking brake is 9.
applied.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
CAUTION an enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera- 7
If you restart the engine while the tion of a motor vehicle in an
vehicle is moving, shift the select enclosed environment can cause
lever into the “N” position. Do not a harmful build-up of Carbon
attempt to place the select lever of a Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
moving vehicle into the “P” posi- harmful to your health. Exposure
tion. to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
& Stopping the engine sciousness and/or death.
The ignition switch should be turned off . Before performing any servicing
only when the vehicle is stopped and the of the vehicle, temporarily place
engine is idling. the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
WARNING system from unexpectedly start-
Do not stop the engine when the ing the engine.
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
– CONTINUED –
tions before starting, and if all safety transmitter is within the operating range of
parameters are correct, the engine will the system.
start within 5 seconds. Upon successful
engine start, the remote start confirmation & Remote start safety features
transmitter button will flash twice every 5 For safety and security reasons, the
seconds* and the vehicle will honk the system will fail to start and honk the horn
horn and flash the side marker lights, tail twice or shut down the engine during
lights and the parking lights once, then the remote start operation if any of the
lights will illuminate and remain illumi- following occur:
nated, indicating that the engine is run-
ning. While the vehicle is operating via the . Any of the doors or the trunk / rear gate
remote engine start function, the power are open / opened (*the vehicle’s horn will
window features will be disabled. Also, the honk six times and the side marker lights,
system has a timer and will shut down tail lights and the parking lights will flash
six times indicating that a vehicle door or
& Starting your vehicle after 15 minutes if you do not operate the
trunk / rear gate was open when the
vehicle. Press and hold the “ ” button for
NOTE 2 seconds to turn the engine off. The remote engine start system was acti-
All vehicle doors, the engine hood and remote start confirmation transmitter but- vated).
trunk / rear gate must be closed prior to ton will flash three times* indicating that . The brake pedal is depressed
activating the remote engine start sys- the engine has shut down. If the starter . The key was already in the ignition
tem. Any open entry point will prevent cranks but does not start or starts and switch
starting or cause the system to shut stalls, the remote engine start system will . The engine hood is opened
down. power off and then attempt to start the . The remote start system “Service
The remote engine start function is acti- engine an additional three times unless mode” is engaged
vated by pressing the “ ” button twice the remote engine start system deter- . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
within 3 seconds on your remote engine mines that a vehicle malfunction is pre- reached a level over 3,500 RPM
start transmitter. Upon successful activa- venting the system from starting. If the . The alarm is triggered by opening a
tion the remote start confirming transmitter engine does not start after additional door or the rear gate.
button will flash once* and the vehicle will attempts, the remote engine start system
will abort and return to a non-activate . The select lever is not in the “P”
honk the horn and flash the side marker position (CVT models)
lights, tail lights and parking lights once. state.
The system will check certain precondi- *: Provided that the remote engine start In addition to the items above, if the
vehicle’s engine management system remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-
determines there is a safety risk due to a arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm
vehicle related problem, the engine will system” F2-10.
shut down and the vehicle’s horn will honk 2. Enter the vehicle.
three times. 3. The engine will shut down when any
NOTE door or trunk/rear gate is opened.
4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
. If the alarm system is armed at the
and turn to the “START” position to restart
time of remote engine start activation
the engine.
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed & Remote start confirmation
throughout the remote start run cycle. transmitter feature
. If the alarm system is disarmed at Your remote engine start transmitter is
the time of remote engine start activa- equipped with a unique bidirectional con- 7
tion (the security indicator light on the firmation feature. This feature will allow
combination meter is not flashing), the the transmitter’s backlit button to display
alarm system will remain disarmed the status of the system under the condi-
throughout the remote start run cycle. tion that the vehicle and transmitter are
within the operational range of the system.
& Entering the vehicle while it Typical transmitter button flash sequences
are outlined in the following chart.
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
to activating the remote engine start
system) and the engine will turn off.
Inserting the key into the ignition switch
and turning it to the “ON” position or
pressing the unlock button “ ” on the
– CONTINUED –
& Service mode & Remote transmitter program confirmation transmitter button will flash
In service mode, the remote engine start New transmitters can be programmed to one time.
function is temporarily disabled to prevent the remote engine start system in the 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
the system from unexpectedly starting the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, transmitters (the system will accept up to
engine while being serviced. damaged or additional transmitters are eight transmitters).
desired (the system will accept up to eight 8. The system will exit the transmitter
To engage or disengage service mode: transmitters). New remote engine start learn mode if the key is turned to the
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle transmitters can be programmed accord- “LOCK” (off) position, the door is closed or
doors and the trunk/rear gate. ing to the following procedure. after 2 minutes.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P” 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
position (CVT models) door must remain opened throughout the & System maintenance
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal entire process). NOTE
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
position 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then replaced, discharged or disconnected, 7
5. Press and release the remote engine “LOCK” (off), back to “ON” then “LOCK” it will be necessary to start the vehicle
start transmitter “ ” button three times. (off), back to “ON” then “LOCK” (off), then a minimum of one time using the key
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn back to “ON” again and leave the ignition prior to activating the remote engine
each time the button is pressed. “ON” throughout the programming pro- start system. This is required to allow
6. The system will pause for 1 second cess. the vehicle electronic systems to re-
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to 4. The system will flash the side marker synchronize.
indicate that the service mode has been lights, tail lights and parking lights and
engaged or honk one time to indicate that honk the horn three times, indicating that ! Changing the batteries
the service mode has been disengaged. the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode. CAUTION
NOTE 5. Press and release the “ ” button on
the transmitter that you want to program. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
When taking your vehicle in for service, or in the remote engine start
it is recommended that you inform the 6. The system will flash the side marker transmitter when replacing the
service personnel that your vehicle is lights, tail lights and parking lights and battery.
equipped with a remote engine start honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system. system has learned the transmitter. Upon . Be careful not to damage the
successful programming, the remote start printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
– CONTINUED –
mph (km/h)
& Shifting speeds Except XV CROSSTREK & Driving tips
Gear XV CROSSTREK models
! Recommended shifting speeds models Do not drive with your foot resting on the
The best compromise between fuel econ- 1st 30 (48) 28 (46)
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
omy and vehicle performance during hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
2nd 55 (89) 53 (86) upgrade. Either of those actions may
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table. 3rd 80 (130) 78 (126) cause clutch damage.
4th Do not drive with your hand resting on the
Legal speed limit shift lever. This may cause wear on the
Shift up mph (km/h) (Posted limit speed)
5th transmission components.
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40) When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
WARNING speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
4th to 5th 45 (72) When shifting down a gear, ensure
lower gear before the engine starts to
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
labor.
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
! Maximum allowable speeds
lowable Speed for the gear which is On steep downgrades, downshift the
The following table shows the maximum about to be selected. Failure to transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
speeds that are possible with each differ- observe this precaution can lead to necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will engine over-revving and this in turn speed and to extend brake pad life.
enter the red area if these speeds are can result in engine damage. In this way, the engine provides a braking
exceeded. effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
In addition, sudden application of
With the exception of cases where sudden engine brakes when the vehicle is the brakes while descending a hill, they
acceleration is required, the vehicle travelling on a slippery surface can may overheat and not work properly.
should not be driven with the tachometer’s lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
needle inside the red area. Failure to The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
quence, control of the vehicle may
observe this precaution can lead to when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
be lost and the risk of an accident
excessive engine wear and poor fuel rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
increased.
economy. phenomenon is not an indication of a
problem in your vehicle.
NOTE
Never exceed the posted speed limit.
Continuously variable trans- cause damage to the transmis- transmission operation is somewhat
sion. unusual. This results from invalidation
mission of data which the on-board computer
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake has collected and stored in memory to
WARNING and then place the select lever in allow the transmission to shift at the
the “P” position. Avoid parking most appropriate times for the current
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” for a long time with the select condition of your vehicle. Optimized
position into the “D” or “R” position lever in any other position as shifting will be restored as the vehicle
while depressing the accelerator doing so could result in a dead continues to be driven for a while.
pedal. This may cause the vehicle battery. . When driving a CVT model under
to jump forward or backward. continuous heavy load conditions such
as when towing a camper or climbing a
& Continuously variable trans- long, steep hill, the engine speed or the
CAUTION mission features vehicle speed may automatically be
reduced. This is not a malfunction. This 7
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position The continuously variable transmission is phenomenon results from the engine
only after the vehicle is comple- electronically controlled and provides an control function maintaining the cool-
tely stopped. Shifting while the infinite number of forward speeds and 1 ing performance of the vehicle. The
vehicle is moving may cause reverse speed. For some models, it also engine and vehicle speed will return to
damage to the transmission. has a manual mode or an “L” position. a normal speed when the engine is able
. Do not race the engine for more to maintain the optimum cooling per-
NOTE formance after the heavy load de-
than 5 seconds in any position . When the engine coolant tempera-
except the “N” or “P” position creases. Driving under a heavy load
ture is still low, the transmission will must be performed with extreme care.
when the brake is applied or upshift to higher engine speeds than
when chocks are used in the Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
when the coolant temperature is suffi- when driving on an uphill slope while
wheels. This may cause the ciently high in order to shorten the
transmission fluid to overheat. towing.
warm-up time and improve driveability. . The continuously variable transmis-
. Avoid shifting from one of the The gearshift timing will automatically sion is a chain type system that
forward driving positions into the shift to the normal timing after the provides superior transmission effi-
“R” position or vice versa until engine has warmed up. ciency for maximum fuel economy. At
the vehicle has completely . Immediately after transmission fluid times, depending on varying driving
stopped. Such shifting may is replaced, you may feel that the conditions, a chain operating sound
– CONTINUED –
may be heard that is characteristic of When you park the vehicle, first apply the
this type of system. parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
& Select lever the mechanical friction of the transmis-
sion.
! Select lever positions
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
1) Models with “L” position shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
2) Models with manual mode vehicle completely then move the lever to
: With the brake pedal depressed, the “R” position while pressing the select
shift while pressing the select lever lever button in.
button in. When the ignition switch has been turned
: Shift while pressing the select lever to the “LOCK” (off) position, movement of
1) Select lever button button in. the select lever from the “N” to “R” position
: Shift without pressing the select is possible for a limited time period by
lever button. depressing the brake pedal, and then it
The select lever has four positions, “P”, becomes impossible. For details, refer to
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M” “Shift lock function” F7-23.
gate. ! N (Neutral)
! P (Park) This position is for restarting a stalled
This position is for parking the vehicle and engine. In this position, the transmission is
starting the engine. In this position, the neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission is mechanically locked to transmission are not locked. Therefore,
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely. the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied. controls the driving performance and & Selection of manual mode (if
engine braking while corresponding to equipped)
Avoid coasting with the transmission in the road grade.
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition. When more acceleration is required in the
“D” position, depress the accelerator
WARNING pedal fully to the floor and hold that
position. The transmission will automati-
Do not drive the vehicle with the cally downshift. When you release the
select lever in the “N” (neutral) pedal, the transmission will return to the
position. Engine braking has no original gear position.
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in- For models with manual mode, if one of
creased. the shift paddles behind the steering
wheel is operated while driving in the “D”
position, the transmission will temporarily 7
NOTE switch to the manual mode. In this mode,
With the vehicle either moving or station-
If the select lever is in the “N” position you can shift into any gear position using
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
when you stop the engine for parking, the shift paddles. For details about the
position to the “M” position to select the
you may not subsequently be able to manual mode, refer to “Selection of
manual mode.
move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If manual mode” F7-21. Once the vehicle
this happens, turn the ignition switch to speed stabilizes, the transmission will
the “ON” position. You will then be able switch from the manual mode back to
to move the select lever to the “P” the “D” position for normal driving.
position.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require. Also, while driving up and
down a hill, the transmission assists and
– CONTINUED –
& Selection of “L” (if equipped) illuminate on the combination meter. ! Shift lock release
To deselect “L”, move the selector lever to If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the “D” position. the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
& Shift lock function “P” position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever. If the select lever does not move after
. The select lever cannot be operated performing the above procedure, perform
unless the ignition switch is turned to the the following steps.
“ON” position and the brake pedal is . When the select lever cannot be
depressed. shifted from “P” to “N”:
. The select lever cannot be moved from Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
the “P” position to any other position lock release button” F7-24.
“L” is for using engine braking when going before the brake pedal is depressed. . When the select lever cannot be 7
down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move Depress the brake pedal first, and then shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
the selector lever from the “D” position to operate the select lever. Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
the “L” position. . Only the “P” position allows you to turn tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position select lever to the “P” position with the
to the “LOCK” (off) position and remove select lever button pressed and brake
the key from the ignition switch. pedal depressed.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK” (off) position while the select lever If you must perform the above procedure,
is in the “N” position, the select lever may the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
not be moved to the “P” position after a system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
period of time. Therefore, move the select SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
lever to the “P” position with the brake as possible.
pedal depressed soon after the ignition If the select lever does not move after
switch is turned to the “LOCK” (off) performing the above procedure, refer to
position. “Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-24.
When selected, the indicator “L” will
– CONTINUED –
! Shift lock release using the shift . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
lock release button position on an uphill grade by using the
Perform the following procedure to release “D” position. Use the brake instead.
the shift lock. . The engine may, on rare occasions,
1. Apply the parking brake and turn the knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ignition switch to the “LOCK” (off) position. ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit 7
the power assist in order to prevent the
1) U.S.-spec. models system components, such as the con-
2) Except U.S.-spec. models trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
& Power steering system fea- quently and turned sharply while the
tures vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
The vehicle is equipped with an electric speeds, such as while frequently turn-
power steering system. When the ignition ing the steering wheel during parallel
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the parking.
power steering warning light on the . The steering wheel remains in the
combination meter illuminates to inform fully turned position for a long period
the driver that the warning system is of time.
functioning properly. Then, if the engine
At this time, there will be more resis-
started, the warning light turns off to inform
tance when steering. However this is
the driver that the steering power assist is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
operational.
force will be restored after the steering
cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- following distance from other
assist system is operating properly. vehicles.
tem)
. You might feel that the brake pedal . When driving on badly surfaced
is applied by lighter force and gener- roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
ates a greater braking force. The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
wheels which may occur during sudden over deep newly fallen snow,
. You might hear an ABS operating stopping distances may be long-
noise from the engine compartment. braking or braking on slippery road sur-
faces. This helps prevent the loss of er for a vehicle with the ABS
steering control and directional stability system than one without. When
& Disc brake pad wear warning caused by wheel lock-up. driving under these conditions,
indicators therefore, reduce your speed and
When the ABS system is operating, you leave ample distance from other
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vehicles.
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal . When tire chains are installed,
when the ABS operates. stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS
7
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 6 system than one without. Be sure
mph (10 km/h). to reduce your speed and main-
tain a safe distance from the
WARNING vehicle in front.
. When you feel the ABS system
Always use the utmost care in operating, you should maintain
driving – overconfidence because constant brake pedal pressure.
you are driving a vehicle with the Do not pump the brake pedal
ABS system could easily lead to a since doing so may defeat the
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
serious accident. operation of the ABS system.
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard CAUTION
from the disc brakes while braking, im- & ABS system self-check
mediately have your vehicle checked by . The ABS system does not always Just after the vehicle is started, you may
your SUBARU dealer. decrease stopping distance. You feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
should always maintain a safe to when the ABS operates, and you may
– CONTINUED –
also hear the sound of the ABS working Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system
from the engine compartment. This is malfunctions
caused by an automatic functional test of
tribution (EBD) system
the ABS system being carried out and
does not indicate any abnormal condition. The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
& ABS warning light brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-16. the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
system’s components to perform its func-
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD system malfunction, the If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
EBD system also stops working. the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
When the EBD system is operating, you light illuminate simultaneously.
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
and does not indicate a malfunction. the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
conventional braking system will still func-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously, gerous. This indicates your brake Vehicle Dynamics Control
take the following steps. system may not be working system
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, properly. If the light remains
flat location. illuminated, have the brakes in- & Safety precautions
2. Shut down the engine, apply the spected by a SUBARU dealer
parking brake, and then restart it. immediately.
WARNING
3. Release the parking brake. If both . If at all in doubt about whether
warning lights turn off, the EBD system the brakes are operating prop- Always use the utmost care in
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to erly, do not drive the vehicle. driving – overconfidence because
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the Have your vehicle towed to the you are driving a vehicle with the
system inspected. nearest SUBARU dealer for re- Vehicle Dynamics Control system
4. If both warning lights illuminate again pair. could easily lead to a serious acci-
and remain illuminated after the engine dent.
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check 7
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid” CAUTION
F11-16. . Even if your vehicle is equipped
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the with Vehicle Dynamics Control
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be system, winter tires should be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the used when driving on snow-cov-
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the ered or icy roads; in addition,
system inspected. vehicle speed should be reduced
6. If the brake fluid level is below the considerably. Simply having a
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the tem does not guarantee that the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
WARNING . Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
. Driving with the brake system indication that the road being
warning light illuminated is dan- travelled on has a slippery sur-
– CONTINUED –
face; since having Vehicle Dy- spare tire, the effectiveness of maintain traction and directional control.
namics Control is no guarantee the Vehicle Dynamics Control
. Traction Control Function
that full vehicle control will be system is reduced and this
maintained at all times and under should be taken into account The traction control function is designed to
all conditions, its activation when driving the vehicle in prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
should be seen as a sign that such a condition. slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
the speed of the vehicle should maintain traction and directional control.
. If non-matching tires are used, Activation of this function is shown by
be reduced considerably. the Vehicle Dynamics Control steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy-
. Whenever suspension compo- system may not operate cor- namics Control operation indicator light.
nents, steering components, or rectly.
an axle are removed from a . The Vehicle Dynamics Control . Skid Suppression Function
vehicle, have an inspection of system helps prevent unstable The skid suppression function is designed
that system performed by an vehicle motion such as skidding to help maintain directional stability by
authorized SUBARU dealer. using control of the brakes and suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
. The following precautions should engine power. Do not turn off the sideways during steering operations. Acti-
be observed in order to ensure Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- vation of this function is shown by flashing
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- tem unless it is absolutely ne- of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
trol system is operating properly: cessary. If you must turn off the indicator light.
– All four wheels should be Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully accord- NOTE
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further- ing to the road surface condi- . The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
more, the amount of wear tions. tem may be considered normal when
should be the same for all the following conditions occur.
four tires. – Slight twitching of the brake
– Keep the tire pressure at the
& System features pedal is felt.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding – The vehicle or steering wheel
proper level as shown on the
on a slippery road surface and/or during shakes to a small degree.
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar. cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, – An operating sound from the
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system engine compartment is heard
– Use only the specified tem- briefly when starting the engine
adjusts the engine’s output and the
porary spare tire to replace a and when driving off after starting
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
flat tire. With a temporary the engine.
– CONTINUED –
7-32 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Tire pressure monitoring
Control OFF indicator light turns off. Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
deactivated, traction and stability en- still activate. When the brake control models)
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
Control system is unavailable. Therefore namics Control operation indicator
you should not deactivate the Vehicle light flashes.
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem will be activated automatically
when the engine is started.
. If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system Low tire pressure warning light
ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
again, turn the ignition switch to the vides the driver with a warning message
“LOCK” (off) position and restart the by sending a signal from a sensor that is
engine. installed in each wheel when tire pressure
. When the switch is pressed to is severely low.
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- The tire pressure monitoring system will
trol system, the vehicle’s running per- activate only when the vehicle is driven at
formance is comparable with that of a speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle this system may not react immediately to a
Dynamics Control system. Do not de- sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control a blow-out caused by running over a
system except when absolutely neces- sharp object).
sary.
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models) 7-33
WARNING low pressure threshold, the low tire wheel if there is no damage to it and
pressure warning light should turn if the sealant residue is properly
If the low tire pressure warning light off a few minutes later. cleaned off. If the light illuminates
illuminates while driving, never If this light still illuminates while steadily after blinking for approxi-
brake suddenly and keep driving driving after adjusting the tire pres- mately one minute, promptly con-
straight ahead while gradually redu- sure, a tire may have significant tact a SUBARU dealer to have the
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the damage and a fast leak that causes system inspected.
road to a safe place. Otherwise an the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
accident involving serious vehicle a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
damage and serious personal injury as soon as possible. CAUTION
could occur.
When a spare tire is mounted or a . Do not place metal film or any
Check the pressure for all four tires wheel rim is replaced without the metal parts in the cargo area/
and adjust the pressure to the COLD original pressure sensor/transmitter trunk. This may cause poor re-
tire pressure shown on the tire
placard on the door pillar on the
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
ception of the signals from the 7
tire pressure sensors, and the
driver’s side. steadily after blinking for approxi- tire pressure monitoring system
Even when the vehicle is driven a mately one minute. This indicates will not function properly.
very short distance, the tires get the TPMS is unable to monitor all . FCC WARNING
warm and their pressures increase four road wheels. Contact your
accordingly. Be sure to let the tires SUBARU dealer as soon as possible Changes or modifications not
cool thoroughly before adjusting for tire and sensor replacement and/ expressly approved by the party
their pressures to the standard or system resetting. responsible for compliance
values shown on the tire placard. could void the user’s authority
When a tire is repaired with liquid to operate the equipment.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-21. sealant, the tire pressure warning
The tire pressure monitoring system valve and transmitter may not oper-
does not function when the vehicle ate properly. If a liquid sealant is NOTE
is stationary. After adjusting the tire used, contact your nearest SUBARU This device complies with Part 15 of
pressures, increase the vehicle dealer or other qualified service the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) shop as soon as possible. Make Rules. Operation is subject to the
to start the TPMS re-checking of the sure to replace the tire pressure following two conditions: (1) this de-
tire inflation pressures. If the tire warning valve and transmitter when vice may not cause harmful interfer-
pressures are now above the severe replacing the tire. You may reuse the
– CONTINUED –
ence, and (2) this device must accept Parking your vehicle CAUTION
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired & Parking brake Never drive while the parking brake
operation. is set because this will cause un-
To set the parking brake, depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold it down until necessary wear on the brake lin-
the parking brake lever is fully pulled up. ings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
When facing downhill, the front wheels spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
should be turned into the curb. optional), pay attention to blocks
Hill start assist OFF indicator light is any steps in the following procedure,
illuminated place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
(off) position once and then start over
When using the Hill start assist system, a again.
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released. However, ! To deactivate
for MT models, this braking effect should
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
disappear once the clutch pedal is re-
location and apply the parking brake.
leased.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
NOTE (off) position.
A slight jolt may be felt when the 3. Restart the engine.
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
7
& To activate/deactivate the Hill
start assist system
CAUTION
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, when starting on an
uphill grade, braking power is not
maintained if the brake pedal is
released. Start on an uphill grade
by using the parking brake. 4. Confirm the following items.
. when starting backward facing uphill (1) The Brake system warning light
. when starting forward facing downhill You can activate/deactivate the Hill start illuminates.
. while the parking brake is applied assist system according to the following (2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” procedure. warning light turns off.
or “LOCK” (off) position (3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
NOTE OFF indicator light turns off.
. while the Hill start assist warning light/
If you make an error when performing
– CONTINUED –
(4) The ABS warning light turns off. system is activated. When the Hill start
assist system is activated, the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light turns off.
& Hill start assist warning light/
Hill start assist OFF indicator
light
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill
start assist OFF indicator light” F3-18.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch 7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch,
5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
OFF switch and hold it until the Vehicle switch once again. Then the Hill start
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light “ ” assist OFF indicator light blinks.
on the combination meter illuminates for
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
several seconds and then turns off.
(off) position. The hill start assist system
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle has now been deactivated.
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF switch. NOTE
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
indicator light blinks.
! To activate
When the procedure to deactivate the Hill
start assist system is performed again, the
Cruise control (if equipped) & To set cruise control combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
Cruise control enables you to maintain a vehicle reaches the desired speed.
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade Cruise control main button 7
. driving on slippery or winding 1. Press the cruise control main button.
roads 3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side and release it. Then release
. driving in heavy traffic
the accelerator pedal.
. towing a trailer
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is
not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting of the cruise control.
– CONTINUED –
& To turn off the cruise control U.S.-spec. models set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
There are two ways to turn off the cruise When the difference between the actual vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph
control: vehicle speed and the set speed is less (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can cruise control system regards this
. Press the cruise control main button operation as that intended to decrease
again. be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the the vehicle speed.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “RES” side quickly. . Except U.S.-spec. models
“LOCK” (off) position (but only when the If the difference between the actual
vehicle is completely stopped). Except U.S.-spec. models vehicle speed when the switch is
When the difference between the actual pressed and the speed last time you
& To change the cruising speed vehicle speed and the set speed is less set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/ increased 1 km/h each time by pressing
SET” switch) occurs because the cruise control
the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side system regards this operation as that
quickly. intended to decrease the vehicle 7
! To increase the speed (by accel- speed.
erator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
erator pedal.
! To decrease the speed (by the than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
“RES/SET” switch) lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
“RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side
quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches & Cruise control indicator light
the desired speed. Then, release the Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment F3-22.
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed. & Cruise control set indicator
U.S.-spec. models
light
When the difference between the actual Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
vehicle speed and the set speed is less F3-22.
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side quickly.
Except U.S.-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rail (if equipped) ........................................ 8-14
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Roof molding and crossbar (5-door models — if
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4 equipped) ........................................................ 8-14
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-4 Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-16
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17
Except XV CROSSTREK models .......................... 8-6 When not towing a trailer ................................... 8-18
XV CROSSTREK models ..................................... 8-6 Trailer towing (XV CROSSTREK models) ........ 8-18
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-18
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-18
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-22
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22 8
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-24
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11
8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
km) The following suggestions will help to save
fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km): reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not maintain that speed for as long as gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
possible.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm . Always properly maintain the en-
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Never run the engine in a closed
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency. driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
. Avoid remaining in a parked
tire wear and fuel consumption.
The same break-in procedures should be vehicle for a lengthy time while
. Use the air conditioner only when the engine is running. If that is
applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary.
mounted engine or when brake pads or unavoidable, then use the venti-
. Keep the front and rear wheels in lation fan to force fresh air into
brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or . Always keep the front ventilator
cargo. inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter firing or incomplete combustion), have
vehicle, have t he probl em your vehicle checked and repaired by an
checked and corrected as soon authorized SUBARU dealer.
as possible. If you must drive . Do not apply undercoating or rust
under these conditions, drive prevention treatment to the heat shield of
only with all windows fully open. catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
. Keep the trunk lid (4-door) or rear tem.
gate (5-door) closed while driving . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
to prevent exhaust gas from level.
entering the vehicle.
WARNING
NOTE . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
Due to the expansion and contraction or park the vehicle anywhere
of the metals used in the manufacture near flammable materials (e.g.,
of the exhaust system, you may hear a grass, paper, rags or leaves),
The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
crackling sound coming from the ex- exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to operates at very high tempera-
8
haust system for a short time after the reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
engine has been shut off. This sound is tures.
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
normal. . Keep everyone and flammable
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver- materials away from the exhaust
ter: pipe while the engine is running.
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small The exhaust gas is very hot.
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD models
To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
at all times, always have the recom- another country:
WARNING
mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct . Always maintain a safe driving
the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3. speed according to the road and
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and re- weather conditions in order to
formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country. avoid having an accident on a
intervals. sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing tire
(s), all four tires must be the
same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
tire placard is located on the There is little difference in handling,
driver’s door pillar. however, during extremely sharp turns or
If all of four tires are not the same sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
for items (a) to (h), serious me- down a slope or turning corners, be sure
chanical damage could occur to to reduce your speed and maintain an
the drive train of your car, and ample distance from other vehicles.
affect the following. . Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recom-
— Ride
mended tire pressure is provided on the
— Handling tire placard, which is located under the
— Braking door latch on the driver’s side.
— Speedometer/Odometer . There are some precautions that you
calibration All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine must observe when towing your vehicle.
power to all four wheels. AWD models For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
— Clearance between the body provide better traction when driving on F9-14.
and tires slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and 8
It also may be dangerous and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
lead to loss of vehicle control, By shifting power between the front and
and it can lead to an accident. rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration
and added engine braking force during
CAUTION deceleration.
If you use a temporary spare tire to Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the may handle differently than an ordinary
original temporary spare tire stored two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may some features unique to AWD. For safety
result in severe mechanical damage purposes as well as to avoid damaging
to the drive train of your vehicle. the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind.
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
Off road driving result in damage not eligible for repair such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
under warranty. wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
If you do take your SUBARU off road, you
WARNING
should review the common sense precau- . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
. Always maintain a safe driving tions in the next section (applicable to the
over rough terrain.
speed according to the road and XV CROSSTREK models) for general
guidance. But please keep in mind that . Slow down and employ extra caution at
weather conditions in order to
your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are all times. When driving off-road, you will
avoid having an accident on a
more limited than those of the XV not have the benefit of marked traffic
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
CROSSTREK models. lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
ing or under other similar condi-
Never attempt to drive through pools and the like.
tions.
puddles, or roads flooded with water. . Do not drive across steep slopes.
. Always use the utmost care in Instead, drive either straight up or straight
driving – overconfidence be- Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto down the slopes. A vehicle can much
cause you are driving an All- more easily tip over sideways than it can
Wheel Drive model could easily electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall. end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
lead to a serious accident. down slopes that are too steep.
& XV CROSSTREK models . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
& Except XV CROSSTREK cially at higher speeds.
Because of the AWD feature and higher
models ground clearance, your SUBARU can be . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven- wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passenger car and is with your fingers and thumbs on the
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed outside of the rim.
primarily for on-road use. The AWD neither a conventional off-road vehicle
nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take . If driving through water, such as when
feature gives it some limited off-road crossing shallow streams, first check the
capabilities in situations in which the your SUBARU off-road, certain common
sense precautions such as those in the depth of the water and the bottom of the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc- stream bed for firmness and ensure that
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road following list should be taken:
. Make certain that you and all of your the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
driving conditions. Operating it under other and cross the stream without stopping.
than those conditions could subject the passengers are wearing seatbelts.
The water should be shallow enough that
vehicle to excessive stress which might . Carry some emergency equipment, it does not reach the vehicle’s under-
carriage. Water entering the engine air piled higher than the seatbacks. During els)
intake or the exhaust pipe or water sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo – Continuously variable transmission
splashing onto electrical parts may da- could be thrown around in the vehicle and fluid (CVT models)
mage your vehicle and may cause it to cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on – Front differential gear oil (CVT
stall. Never attempt to drive through the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s models)
rushing water; regardless of its depth, it center of gravity and make it more prone
can wash away the ground from under to tip over. Remember that damage done to your
your tires, resulting in possible loss of . If you must rock the vehicle to free it SUBARU while operating it off-road and
traction and even vehicle rollover. from sand or mud, depress the accelerator not using common sense precautions
. Always check your brakes for effec- pedal slightly and move the shift lever/ such as those listed above is not eligible
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, select lever back and forth between “1”/ for warranty coverage.
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat engine. For the best possible traction,
that process several times to dry out the avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
brake discs and brake pads. free the vehicle.
. Do not drive or park over or near . Never equip your vehicle with tires
flammable materials such as dry grass or larger than those specified in this manual. 8
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
exhaust system is very hot while the road driving. Suspension components are
engine is running and right after engine particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
stops. This could create a fire hazard. need to be washed thoroughly.
. After driving through tall grass, mud, . Frequent driving of an AWD model
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there under hard-driving conditions such as
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, rough roads or off roads will necessitate
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the more frequent replacement of the follow-
underbody. Clear off any such matter from ing items than that specified in the
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with maintenance schedule described in the
these materials trapped or adhering to the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or – Engine oil
fire could occur. – Brake fluid
. Secure all cargo carried inside the – Rear differential gear oil
vehicle and make certain that it is not – Manual transmission oil (MT mod-
Clear away ice and snow that has brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- Always maintain ample distance between
accumulated under the fenders to avoid ness. your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
making steering difficult. During severe to avoid the need for sudden braking.
winter driving, stop when and where it is WARNING To supplement the foot brake, use the
safe to do so and check under the fenders engine brake effectively to control the
periodically. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
gases under your vehicle. Keep
! Parking in cold weather when necessary.)
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
Do not use the parking brake when from around your vehicle if you park Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
parking for long periods in cold weather the vehicle in snow with the engine vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
since it could freeze in that position. running. leading to loss of vehicle control.
Instead, you should observe the following An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
tips. ! Refueling in cold weather hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT mance on snowy and icy roads. For
To help prevent moisture from forming in
models, or the select lever in “P” for CVT information on braking on slippery sur-
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
models.
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
2. Use tire stops under the tires to System)” F7-27 and “Vehicle Dynamics
prevent the vehicle from moving.
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Control system” F7-29. 8
Use only additives that are specifically
When the vehicle is parked in snow or designed for this purpose. When an WARNING
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
the glass to prevent damage to them. longer if the tank is refilled whenever the Do not use the cruise control on
fuel level reaches half empty. slippery roads such as snowy or icy
When the vehicle has been left parked roads. This may cause loss of
after use on roads heavily covered with If your SUBARU is not going to be used
vehicle control.
snow, or has been left parked during a for an extended period, it is best to have
snowstorm, icing may develop on the the fuel tank filled to capacity.
brake system, which could cause poor & Driving on snowy and icy CAUTION
braking action. Check for snow or ice
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
roads
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- engine’s intake system and may
being careful not to damage the disc speed driving, and sharp turning when hinder the airflow, which could re-
driving on snowy or icy roads.
– CONTINUED –
sult in engine shutdown or even using the windshield washer. Refer to & Corrosion protection
breakdown. “Windshield washer” F3-77. Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
! Wiper operation when snowing wiper from working effectively. If snow is & Snow tires
Before driving in cold weather, make sure stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
the wiper blades are not frozen to the a safe place, then remove it. If you stop WARNING
windshield or rear window. the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers. . When replacing or installing win-
If the wiper blades are frozen to the Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-5. ter tire(s), all four tires must be
windshield or rear window, perform the the same for following items.
following procedure. We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the (a) Size
. To thaw the windshield wiper blades,
use the defroster with the airflow selection seasons you could have snow and freez- (b) Circumference
in “ ” and the temperature set for ing temperatures. Blades of this type give (c) Speed symbol
maximum warmth until the wiper blades superior wiping performance in snowy (d) Load index
are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are suitable for your vehicle. (e) Construction
control” F4-1.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper (f) Manufacturer
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
CAUTION (g) Brand (tread pattern)
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog- During high-speed driving, non- (h) Degrees of wear
ger and deicer” F3-88. freezing type wiper blades may not For the items (a) to (d), you must
. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the perform as well as standard wiper obey the specification that is
rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger blades. If this happens, reduce the printed on the tire placard. The
and deicer” F3-88. vehicle speed. tire placard is located on the
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts driver’s door pillar.
to stick on the surface of the windshield NOTE If all of four winter tires are not
despite wiper operation, use the defroster When the season requiring non-freez- the same for items (a) to (h),
with the airflow selection in “ ” and the ing type wiper blades is over, replace serious mechanical damage
temperature set for maximum warmth. them with standard wiper blades. could occur to the drive train of
After the windshield gets warmed enough your car, and affect the following.
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away — Ride
— Handling tire, make sure that there is enough traction device is not covered under
— Braking clearance between the tire and vehicle warranty.
body.
— Speedometer/Odometer Make certain that any traction device
calibration Remember to drive with care at all times you use is an SAE class S device, and
— Clearance between the body regardless of the type of tires on your use it on the front wheels only. Always
and tires vehicle. use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence be-
It also may be dangerous and & Tire chains cause you are using a traction device
lead to loss of vehicle control, could easily lead to a serious accident.
and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
& Rocking the vehicle
Tire chains cannot be used on your
since it may cause dangerous vehicle because of the lack of If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
handling characteristics and lead clearance between the tires and snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
to an accident. vehicle body. erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season “1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the 8
tires” as original equipment, which are NOTE engine. For the best possible traction,
designed to provide an adequate measure When tire chains cannot be used, use avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
of traction, handling and braking perfor- of another type of traction device (such free the vehicle.
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it as spring chains) may be acceptable if When the road surface is extremely
may be possible to enhance performance use on your vehicle is recommended slippery, you can obtain better traction by
through use of tires designed specifically by the device manufacturer, taking into starting the vehicle with the transmission
for winter driving conditions. account tire size and road conditions. in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT
When you choose to install winter tires on Follow the device manufacturer’s in- models).
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire structions, especially regarding max-
If your vehicle is a CVT model, for
size and type. You must install four winter imum vehicle speed.
information about holding the transmission
tires that are of the same size, construc- To help avoid damage to your vehicle, in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
tion, brand and load range and you should drive slowly, readjust or remove the manual mode” F7-21.
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires device if it is contacting your vehicle,
since this may result in dangerous hand- and do not spin your wheels. Damage
ling characteristics. When you choose a caused to your vehicle by use of a
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
Vehicle Weight Rating and weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
Vehicle placard When possible, the load should be evenly
The load capacity of your vehicle is distributed throughout the vehicle.
determined by weight, not by available If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
cargo space. The maximum load you can Certification label should confirm that GVW and front and 8
carry in your vehicle is shown on the rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s The certification label attached to the
driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
side door pillar. It includes the total weight vehicle scale, found at a commercial
of the driver and all passengers and their (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating). weighing station.
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must Do not use replacement tires with a lower
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the load range than the originals because they
combined total of weight of the vehicle, may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
optional equipment and trailer tongue range than the originals do not increase
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
pending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
– CONTINUED –
& Roof rail (if equipped) roof rails must be used together & Roof molding and crossbar
with the roof rack and any appro- (5-door models — if
priate carrying attachment that equipped)
may be needed. The roof rails
must never be used alone to
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage
to the roof or paint, or a danger-
ous road hazard due to loss of
cargo could result.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
1) Roof rack load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Luggage can be carried on the roof after
securing the roof rack to the roof rails. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
When installing the roof rack on the roof cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind CAUTION
rails, follow the manufacturer’s instruc- effects will be increased.
tions. The roof rails are designed to carry . For cargo carrying purposes, the
loads (luggage and roof rack) of not more roof molding must be used to-
than 150 lbs (68 kg). gether with a roof crossbar kit
and the appropriate carrying at-
CAUTION tachment. Otherwise, damage to
the roof or paint or a dangerous
. When using the roof rack, make road hazard due to loss of cargo
sure that the total carrying load could result.
of the roof rack and luggage does . When using the roof crossbar kit,
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over- make sure that the total weight of
loading may cause damage to the crossbars, carrying attach-
the vehicle. ment and cargo does not exceed
. For cargo carrying purposes, the the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to ! Installing carrying attachments on ! Removal and installation of the
the vehicle and create a safety the crossbars crossbars
hazard. When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
Cargo can be carried after securing the carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
installing the appropriate carrying attach- tions and make sure that the attachment is
ment. When installing the roof crossbar securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. attachments designed specifically for the
When you carry cargo on the roof using crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
attachment, never exceed the maximum ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).
load limit as explained below. You should Before operating the vehicle, make sure
also be careful that your vehicle does not that the cargo is properly secured on the
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating attachment.
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Each of the two roof moldings has two
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
NOTE mounting points for crossbars. Each 8
about loading cargo into or onto your Remember that the vehicle’s center of mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use
vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle” gravity is altered with the weight of the a screwdriver to remove the covers. When
F8-12. The maximum load limit of the load on the roof, thus affecting the installing the crossbars on the roof mold-
cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment driving characteristics. ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. effects will be increased.
Always properly secure all cargo.
& Connecting a trailer receiver tube. should cross under the trailer tongue to
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes ground in case it should disconnect from
through the ball mount. the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
3. Insert the safety pin onto the hitch pin chains taking tight turn situations into
securely. account; however, be careful not to let
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it them drag on the ground.
does not come off the hitch receiver.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
of the vehicle other than the safety
chain hooks.
wire harness by individually activating the Trailer towing (XV CROSS- injuries or vehicle damage that result from
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer towing equipment, or from any
trailer.
TREK models) errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
NOTE CAUTION failure to follow the proper instructions.
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a This “Trailer towing” section is & Warranties and maintenance
watercraft. applicable for XV CROSSTREK SUBARU warranties do not apply to
models. Other vehicle models are vehicle damage or malfunction caused
& When not towing a trailer neither designed nor intended to be by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch used for trailer towing. Therefore, tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover never tow a trailer with other vehicle will be required due to the additional load.
onto the hitch receiver tube. models. (Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin Your vehicle is designed and intended to and Maintenance Booklet”.)
connector of the hitch wire harness to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
protect against possible damage. Under no circumstances should a trailer
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, with any new powertrain component (en-
four-pin connector using terminal grease. brakes, tires and suspension and has an gine, transmission, differential, wheel
adverse effect on fuel economy. bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety (1,600 km) of driving.
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera- & Maximum load limits
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in WARNING
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your Never exceed the maximum load
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the limits explained in the following.
instructions on correct installation and use Exceeding the maximum load limits
provided by the trailer and other towing could cause personal injury and/or
equipment manufacturers. vehicle damage.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
– CONTINUED –
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and ! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
(GVWR)
Certification label
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door of your Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight vehicle. The total weight applied to each axle
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
Rating (GVWR). GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
combined total of the weight of the vehicle, cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, shown on the certification label.
trailer tongue load and any other optional To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
equipment installed on your vehicle. confirm that the total weight and weight
Therefore, the GVW changes depending distribution are within safe driving limits,
on the situation. Determine the GVW each you should have your vehicle and trailer
time before going on a trip by putting your weighed at a commercial weighing station.
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
1) Jack F: Front
Tongue load 2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be adjusted by
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from The tongue load can be weighed with a proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration Never load the trailer with more weight in 8
above. When weighing the tongue load, the back than in the front; approximately
of 200 lbs (90 kg). be sure to position the towing coupler at 60 percent of the trailer load should be in
NOTE the height at which it would be during the front and approximately 40 percent in
actual towing, using a jack as shown. the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
as possible on both the left and right
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
sides.
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
Even in this case, the maximum value prevent a change in weight distribution
is 200 lbs (90 kg). while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
– CONTINUED –
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing & Connecting a trailer
This may cause the rear wheels to equipment.
skid, especially during braking or ! Trailer brakes
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
when vehicle speed is reduced dur- as they can cause damage to the
ing cornering, resulting in over- axle housing, wheel bearings,
WARNING
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing. wheels or tires. . Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
& Trailer hitches trailer. The use of a genuine SUBARU total weight.
trailer hitch is recommended. A genuine
WARNING SUBARU hitch is available from your . Do not directly connect your
SUBARU dealer. trailer’s hydraulic brake system
Never drill the frame or under-body to the hydraulic brake system in
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-
of your vehicle to install a commer- your vehicle. Direct connection
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- would cause the vehicle’s brake
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may performance to deteriorate and
sional hitch supplier to assist you in
enter the passenger compartment could lead to an accident.
choosing an appropriate hitch for your
through the drilled hole. Exhaust vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
gas contains carbon monoxide, a If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
manufacturer’s instructions for installation plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
colorless and odorless gas which is and use.
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. (453 kg), the trailer is required to be
Also, drilling the frame or under- Never use a hitch that mounts only to the equipped with its own brake system.
body of your vehicle could cause rear bumper. The bumper is not designed Electric brakes or surge brakes are
deterioration of strength of your to handle that type of load. recommended, and must be installed
vehicle and cause corrosion around For all types of hitches, regularly check properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
the drilled hole. that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are conform with Federal, state/province and/
tight. or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
CAUTION to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
. Do not modify the vehicle ex- dealer and professional trailer supplier for
haust system, brake system, or more information about the trailer’s brake
other systems when installing a system.
– CONTINUED –
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your the rear, check the total trailer weight, ! Driving with a trailer
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then . You should allow for considerably more
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare confirm that the load and its distribution stopping distance when towing a trailer.
tire is firmly secured. are acceptable. Avoid sudden braking because it may
. Check that the tire pressures are result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
& Trailer towing tips correct. control.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
CAUTION connected properly. Confirm that erations. If your vehicle has a manual
– the trailer tongue is connected transmission, always start out in first gear
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) properly to the hitch ball. and release the clutch at moderate engine
when towing a trailer in hilly – the trailer lights connector is con- revolution.
country on hot days. nected properly and trailer’s brake . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
. When towing a trailer, steering, lights illuminate when the vehicle’s rapid lane changes.
stability, stopping distance and brake pedal is pressed, and that the . Slow down before turning. Make a
braking performance will be dif- trailer’s turn signal lights flash when longer than normal turning radius because
ferent from normal operation. For the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- the trailer wheels will be closer than the
safety’s sake, you should employ ated. vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
extra caution when towing a – the safety chains are connected a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
trailer and you should never properly. vehicle.
drive at excessive speeds. You – all cargo in the trailer is secured
should also keep the following . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
safety in position. handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
tips in mind: – the side mirrors provide a good ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
rearward field of view without a sig- weather conditions or the passing of large
! Before starting out on a trip nificant blind spot. trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- . Sufficient time should be taken to learn grip the steering wheel and slow down
hitch mounting are in good condition. If the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination immediately but gradually.
any problems are apparent, do not tow the before starting out on a trip. In an area free . When passing other vehicles, consid-
trailer. of traffic, practice turning, stopping and erable distance is required because of the
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally backing up. added weight and length caused by
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
tipped sharply up at the front and down at
engine braking effect and prevent over- . For CVT models, avoid using the
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
make sudden downshifts. an uphill slope instead of using the
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the parking brake or foot brake. That may
air conditioner may turn off automatically cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
to protect the engine from overheating. ! Parking on a grade
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay Always block the wheels under both
attention to the following indicators be- vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
cause the engine and transmission are the parking brake firmly. You should not
relatively prone to overheating. park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
: Coolant temperature high warning light hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
: AT OIL TEMP warning light should take the following steps:
1) Left turn (CVT models) 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
2) Right turn down.
If the coolant temperature high warning 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
takes practice. When backing up with a illuminates, immediately turn off the air
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
8
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. conditioner and stop the vehicle in the
When turning back, grip the bottom of the release the regular brakes slowly until the
nearest safe location. For further instruc-
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to blocks absorb the load.
tions and additional information, refer to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right the following sections. 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
for a right turn. apply the parking brake; slowly release
– “If you park your vehicle in case of
. If the ABS warning light illuminates the regular brakes.
an emergency” F9-2
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing – “Engine overheating” F9-13 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
the trailer and have repairs performed models) or “P” position (CVT models)
– “Coolant temperature low indicator
immediately by the nearest SUBARU and shut off the engine.
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
dealer. ing light” F3-13
! Driving on grades – “AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
. Before going down a steep hill, slow models)” F3-15
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (17,1)
In case of emergency
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- . When the wear indicator appears on
porary spare tire periodically to keep the the tread, replace the tire.
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is . The temporary spare tire must be used
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2). only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire 9
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
When using the temporary spare tire, note rear wheel and install the temporary spare
the following. tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
– CONTINUED –
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
Jack-up points 10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on 9. Place the jack under the side sill at the screw, and turn the handle until the tire
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
the wheel cover to remove it. tire. higher than necessary. 9
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
– CONTINUED –
1) Support holder
tools in the passenger compartment Also, this system may not react immedi- possible.
after changing wheels. In a sudden ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for . When a spare tire is mounted or a
stop or collision, loose equipment example, a blow-out caused running over wheel rim is replaced without the
could strike occupants and cause a sharp object). original pressure sensor/trans-
injury. Store the tire and all tools in mitter being transferred, the low
the proper place. WARNING tire pressure warning light will
. If the low tire pressure warning illuminate steadily after blinking
& Tire pressure monitoring light illuminates while driving, for approximately one minute.
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. never brake suddenly. Instead, This indicates the TPMS is un-
models) perform the following procedure. able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
(1) Keep driving straight ahead dealer as soon as possible for
while gradually reducing tire and sensor replacement and/
speed. or system resetting.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a . When a tire is repaired with liquid
safe place. Otherwise an acci- sealant, the tire pressure warning
dent involving serious vehicle valve and transmitter may not
damage and serious personal operate properly. If a liquid sea-
injury could occur. lant is used, contact your nearest 9
(3) Check the pressure for all four SUBARU dealer or other qualified
tires and adjust the pressure service shop as soon as possi-
to the COLD tire pressure ble. Make sure to replace the tire
shown on the vehicle placard pressure warning valve and
on the door pillar on the transmitter when replacing the
Low tire pressure warning light
driver’s side. tire. You may reuse the wheel if
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- there is no damage to it and if the
If this light still illuminates while
vides the driver with the warning message sealant residue is properly
driving after adjusting the tire
indicated by sending a signal from a cleaned off.
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
sensor that is installed in each wheel
cant damage and a fast leak that If the light illuminates steadily
when tire pressure is severely low.
causes the tire to lose air rapidly. after blinking for approximately
The tire pressure monitoring system will If you have a flat tire, replace it one minute, promptly contact a
activate only when the vehicle is driven. with a spare tire as soon as SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
Engine overheating 2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the clockwise slowly without pressing down
engine compartment. Refer to “Engine until it stops. Release the pressure from
hood” F11-5. the radiator. After the pressure has been
WARNING Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If fully released, remove the cap by pressing
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off down and turning it.
Never attempt to remove the radia- the engine and contact an authorized
tor cap until the engine has been SUBARU dealer for repair.
shut off and has fully cooled down. 3. After the coolant temperature high
When the engine is hot, the coolant warning light that has blinked or illumi-
is under pressure. Removing the nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
cap while the engine is still hot For details about the warning light, refer to
could release a spray of boiling hot “Coolant temperature low indicator light/
coolant, which could burn you very Coolant temperature high warning light”
seriously. F3-13.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the check the coolant level in the reserve
road and stop the vehicle in a safe tank. If the coolant level is below the
location. “LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
& If steam is coming from the
mark. 9
engine compartment NOTE
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” For details about how to check the
(off) position and get everyone away from coolant level or how to add coolant,
the vehicle until it cools down. refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
er. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
& If no steam is coming from radiator with coolant.
the engine compartment If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
1. Keep the engine running at idling radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
speed. radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
hole until its thread can no longer be seen. ! Rear towing hook
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bucket. Take the jack
handle out of the trunk (4-door) or cargo
area (5-door).
– CONTINUED –
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. ! Rear tie-down holes WARNING
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
WARNING downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
Do not use the towing hook except other direction, cables may slip out
when towing your vehicle. of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
! Front tie-down hooks
& Using a flat-bed truck
properly with safety chains. Each safety & Towing with all wheels on the . Remember that the brake booster
chain should be equally tightened and ground and power steering do not func-
care must be taken not to pull the chains tion when the engine is not
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
CAUTION effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), be careful not to scrape CAUTION
them when placing the vehicle on . If transmission failure occurs,
the carrier and when removing the transport your vehicle on a flat-
vehicle from the carrier. bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans-
1. Release the parking brake and put the mission damage could result if
transmission in the “N” position. the vehicle is towed with the
2. The ignition switch should be in the engine running.
“ACC” position while the vehicle is being . For CVT models, the traveling
9
towed. speed must be limited to less
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the
prevent damage to the vehicle. traveling distance to less than 31
miles (50 km). For greater speeds
WARNING and distances, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” (off) position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
Appearance care
10
Exterior care brushes could become tangled flushed from the surface and not allowed
around it, damaging the wiper to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
& Washing arm and other components. Ask with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
the automatic car-wash operator remaining water off with a chamois or soft
CAUTION not to let the brushes touch the cloth.
wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm ! Washing the underbody
. When washing the vehicle, the on the rear window glass with
brakes may get wet. As a result, adhesive tape before operating Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
the brake stopping distance will the machine. deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
be longer. To dry the brakes, rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
drive the vehicle at a safe speed derbody components, such as the exhaust
while lightly depressing the NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
brake pedal to heat up the When having your vehicle washed in cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
brakes. an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
. Do not wash the engine compart-
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
ment and area adjacent to it. If
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
water enters the engine air intake
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
of electrical equipment. contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
. Do not use any organic solvents Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty sion.
when washing the surface of the of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or on muddy or
bulb assembly cover. However, if the vehicle with hot water and in direct sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
a detergent with organic solvents sunlight. the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-
is used to wash the cover sur- sion and axle parts, as they are particu-
face, completely rinse off the Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
detergent with water. Otherwise, sap, and bird droppings should be washed not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
the cover surface may be da- off by using a light detergent, as required. caked mud.
maged. If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
. For 5-door models, since your
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
vehicle is equipped with a rear
cleaning agents should be promptly
w i p e r, a u t o m a t i c c a r - w a s h
CAUTION Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, solvents on the surface of the bulb
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of assembly cover. However, if a polish
. Be careful not to damage brake wax on a painted surface leads to loss of or wax with organic solvents is
hoses, sensor harnesses, and the original luster and also quickens the applied to the cover surface, com-
other parts when washing sus- deterioration of the surface. It is recom- pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
pension components. mended that a coat of wax be applied at Otherwise, the cover surface may be
. Be careful not to flush the engine least once a month, or whenever the damaged.
bottom for a long time. It may surface no longer repels water.
cause damage of some electrical If the appearance of the paint has dimin- NOTE
parts. ished to the point where the luster or tone Be careful not to block the windshield
cannot be restored, lightly polish the washer nozzles with wax when waxing
! Using a warm water washer surface with a fine-grained compound. the vehicle.
Never polish just the affected area, but
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
include the surrounding area as well.
or more between the washer nozzle and
Always polish in only one direction. A & Cleaning aluminum wheels
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
mended. Never use a coarse-grained clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
ously. compound. Coarse-grained compounds is left on too long, it may be difficult to
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash have a smaller grain-size number and clean off.
by hand. Some warm water washers are could damage the paint. After polishing
of the high temperature, high pressure . Do not use soap containing grit to
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
type, and they can damage or deform the the original luster. Frequent polishing with
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral 10
resin parts such as moldings, or cause cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
a compound or an incorrect polishing with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
water to leak into the vehicle. technique will result in removing the paint stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When washing device.
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
waxing and polishing. num wheels) with water as soon as
list.
Use a good quality polish and wax and possible when it has been splashed with
apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when driven on roads treated with salt or other
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic agents.
Corrosion protection vehicle remains for a long time, even of maintenance and treatment if you need
though other parts of the vehicle may be assistance.
dry.
Your SUBARU has been designed and Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
built to resist corrosion. Special materials 4. High temperatures will cause corro- soon as you find them.
and protective finishes have been used on sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila- Check the interior of the vehicle for water
fine appearance, strength, and reliable tion. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
operation. because that could cause corrosion.
& To help prevent corrosion Occasionally check under the mats to
& Most common causes of Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent make sure the area is dry.
corrosion corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
The most common causes of corrosion garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
are: promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces. be caused by dampness. If you wash the
1. The accumulation of moisture retain- vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, . roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter into the garage when wet or covered with
cavities, and other areas. snow, that can cause dampness.
2. Damage to paint and other protective . mud, sand, or gravel
coatings caused by gravel and stone . coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
chips or minor accidents. and/or in areas where road salts and other
After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
when: very thorough washing. latch should be inspected and lubricated
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust Before the beginning of winter, check the periodically.
control chemicals, or used in coastal condition of underbody components, such
areas where there is more salt in the air, as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
or in areas where there is considerable lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
industrial pollution. system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, them are found to be rusted, they should
especially when temperatures range just be given an appropriate rust prevention
above freezing. treatment or should be replaced. Contact
3. Dampness in certain parts of the your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials & Synthetic leather upholstery
The leather used by SUBARU is a high The synthetic leather material used on the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber leather materials may be used when
cloth should be performed monthly, taking necessary.
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams. CAUTION
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning Strong cleaning agents such as
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove solvents, paint thinners, window
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cleaner or fuel must never be used
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If on leather or synthetic interior ma-
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long terials. Doing so could damage the
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended surface and cause the color to
that the seats and head restraints be deteriorate.
If the stain does not come out, try a covered, or the windows shaded, to
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
prevent fading or shrinkage. 10
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches & Climate control panel, audio
may be treated with a commercial leather panel, instrument panel,
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- spray lacquer. You will discover that each
tions. leather seat section will develop soft folds
console panel, and switches
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
CAUTION genuine leather. control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
When cleaning the seat, do not use meter panel, and switches.
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Front differential gear oil (CVT models)......... 11-15
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15
Before checking or servicing in the engine Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-16
compartment.................................................... 11-4 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16
When checking or servicing in the engine Brake fluid........................................................ 11-16
compartment.................................................... 11-4 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-16
When checking or servicing in the engine Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-17
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5
Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-17
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-5
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-17
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-7 Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-18
Engine oil............................................................ 11-8 Brake booster .................................................. 11-18
Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap and
oil filter ............................................................ 11-8 Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-18
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-8 Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-18
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-9 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-10 Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-19
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-10 Checking the clutch function............................ 11-19
Cooling system ................................................ 11-11 Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-19
Safety precautions ........................................... 11-11 Hill start assist system.................................... 11-20
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-11 Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-20
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-11 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-20
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-13 Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-21 11
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-13 Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-21
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-14 Types of tires................................................... 11-21
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-14 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-14 equipped) ...................................................... 11-22
Tire inspection................................................. 11-23
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-15
Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-23
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15
Wheel balance ................................................. 11-25
Continuously variable transmission fluid....... 11-15 Wear indicators ............................................... 11-26
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-26
erative. NEVER use a circuit & Before checking or servicing that system in the service mode
tester for this wiring. If your in the engine compartment to prevent it from unexpectedly
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- starting the engine.
sioner needs service, consult WARNING
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
. Always turn the ignition switch to & When checking or servicing
the “LOCK” (off) position and set in the engine compartment
NOTE the parking brake firmly to pre-
SUBARU does not endorse the use of vent the vehicle from moving.
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys- . Always let the engine cool down.
tems and strongly advises against Engine parts become very hot
performing these services on a when the engine is running and
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap- remain hot for some time after
proved flushing systems use chemi- the engine has stopped.
cals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU. . Do not spill engine oil, engine
SUBARU warranties do not cover any coolant, brake fluid or any other
part of the vehicle which is damaged by fluid on hot engine components.
adding or applying chemicals and/or This may cause a fire.
solvents other than those approved or . Always remove the key from the
recommended by SUBARU. ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
the cooling fan may operate
CAUTION
suddenly even when the engine . Do not contact the drive belt
is stopped. If your body or cover while checking the compo-
clothes come into contact with a nents in the engine compart-
rotating fan, that could result in ment. Doing so may cause your
serious injury. hand to slip off the cover and
. Before performing any servicing result in an unexpected injury.
on a vehicle equipped with a . Do not touch the oil filter until the
remote engine start system (a engine has cooled down comple-
dealer option) temporarily place tely. Doing so may result in a
burn or other injury. Note that the Engine hood To open the hood:
oil filter becomes very hot when 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
the engine is running and re- windshield, return them to their original
mains hot for some time after CAUTION position.
the engine has stopped.
. When you open the engine hood,
do not stand the wiper blades up.
& When checking or servicing Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the wind-
in the engine compartment shield wipers. Doing so could
while the engine is running result in damage to the engine
hood and wiper blades.
WARNING
. Be extremely careful not to catch
A running engine can be dangerous. fingers or other objects when
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, closing the engine hood.
hair and tools away from the cooling . Do not push the hood forcibly to
fan, drive belt and any other moving close it. It could deform the
engine parts. Removing rings, metal. 2. Pull the hood release knob under the
watches and ties is advisable. . Be extremely careful opening the instrument panel.
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
11
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
– CONTINUED –
11
Engine oil & Locations of the oil level and insert it again.
gauge, oil filler cap and oil 3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
NOTE filter inserted until it stops.
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has tra-
veled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un-
der normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
conditions, you should check the oil
level at least at every second fuel fill-up 1) Oil level gauge 1) Full level
time, and change the oil more fre- 2) Oil filler cap 2) Low level
quently. Please refer to the Warranty 3) Oil filter 3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
and Maintenance Booklet for more de-
tails. & Checking the oil level 4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
. If the oil consumption rate seems Check the engine oil level at each fuel 5. Check the oil levels on both sides of
abnormally high after the break-in stop. the level gauge. The engine oil level must
period, for example more than 1 quart be judged by the lowest of the two levels.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000 If the oil level is below the low level mark,
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” (off)
kilometers, contact your SUBARU deal- add oil so that the full level is reached.
position. If you check the oil level just after
er.
turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
(off) position, wait a few minutes for the oil CAUTION
to drain back into the oil pan before
checking the level. . Be careful not to touch the en-
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, gine oil filter when removing the
oil filler cap. Doing so may result & Changing the oil and oil filter
in a burn, a pinched finger, or
may cause some other injury. CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis- If you change your own oil, be sure
cosity. to drain all the oil from the filter
before disposal. Do not dispose of
. Be careful not to spill engine oil used engine oil by placing it in the
when adding it. If oil touches the trash, or by pouring it onto the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad ground, into sewers, or into any
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If body of water. Check with your local
engine oil gets on the exhaust government office for the proper
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. disposal options available to you.
. If the level gauge is not pulled out 4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
easily, twist the level gauge right Change the oil and oil filter according to the drain plug while the engine is still
and left, then pull it out. Other- the maintenance schedule in the “War- warm. The used oil should be drained into
wise, you may be injured acci- ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. an appropriate container and disposed of
dentally straining yourself. The engine oil and oil filter must be properly.
changed more frequently than listed in
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil the maintenance schedule when driving WARNING
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil on dusty roads, when short trips are
through the filler neck. After pouring oil frequently made, or when driving in Be careful not to burn yourself with
into the engine, you must use the level extremely cold weather. hot engine oil.
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the 11
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes 5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
to ease draining the engine oil. plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
NOTE securely with a new sealing washer after
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” (off) the oil has completely drained out.
not add any additional oil above the 6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
upper level when the engine is cold. position.
3. Remove the oil filler cap. wrench.
7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
– CONTINUED –
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the quantity of oil that has been drained. mended grade and viscosity.
the engine and install the oil filter by hand The quantity of drained oil differs slightly
turning. Be careful not to twist or damage depending on the temperature of the oil Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
the seal. and the time the oil is left flowing out. After
9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you NOTE
indicated in the following table after the must use the level gauge to confirm that Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
seal makes contact with the seating sur- the level is correct. fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
face. 11. Start the engine and make sure that no provide better fuel economy. However,
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
Oil filter color Part number Amount of seal and drain plug. required to properly lubricate the en-
rotation gine.
12. Run the engine until it reaches the
Black 15208AA160 1 rotation normal operating temperature. Then turn
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” (off) & Synthetic oil
CAUTION position and wait a few minutes to allow
You should use synthetic engine oil that
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
meets the same requirements given for
. Never over tighten the oil filter again and if necessary, add more engine
conventional engine oil. When using
because that can result in an oil oil.
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
leak. classification, viscosity and grade shown
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine CAUTION in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil that has spilled over the oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover. Be careful not to spill engine oil and filter changing intervals shown in the
If spilled oil is not promptly when adding it. If oil touches the Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
wiped up, the oil could cause a exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
fire. smell, smoke, and/or a fire. NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
10. Pour engine oil through the filler neck. & Recommended grade and noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to mended engine oil for optimum engine
viscosity
“Engine oil” F12-4. performance. Conventional oil may be
The oil quantity indicated above is only used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
CAUTION
guideline.
The necessary quantity of oil depends on Use only engine oil with the recom-
Cooling system diluted with another brand or sary, there may be a leak in the engine
type, the maintenance interval is cooling system. It is recommended that
& Safety precautions shortened to that of the mixing the cooling system and connections be
coolant. checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
WARNING . Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol & Engine coolant
Never attempt to remove the radia- contained in the engine coolant
tor cap until the engine has been ! Checking the coolant level
may damage the paint surface.
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is WARNING
under pressure, you may suffer & Cooling fan, hose and con- Never attempt to remove the radia-
serious burns from a spray of boil- nections tor cap until the engine has been
ing hot coolant when the cap is
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling shut off and has cooled down
removed.
fan which is thermostatically controlled to completely. Since the coolant is
operate when the engine coolant reaches under pressure, you may suffer
CAUTION a specific temperature. serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
. Vehicles are filled at the factory If the radiator cooling fan does not operate removed.
with SUBARU Super Coolant that even when the coolant temperature high
does not require the first change warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
years/220,000 km). This coolant Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-
should not be mixed with any tor light/Coolant temperature high warning
other brand or type of coolant light” F3-13. 11
during this period. Mixing with a Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
different coolant will reduce the Refer to “Fuses” F11-35 and “Fuse panel
life of the coolant. Should it be located in the engine compartment” F12-
necessary to top up the coolant 12.
for any reason, use only If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
SUBARU Super Coolant. system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
1) “FULL” level mark 1) Fill up to this level
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop. ! Changing the coolant
1. Check the coolant level on the outside It may be difficult to change the coolant.
of the reservoir while the engine is cool. Have the coolant changed by your
2. If the level is close to or lower than the SUBARU dealer if necessary.
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
The coolant should be changed according
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
to the maintenance schedule in the
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration.
Air cleaner element & Replacing the air cleaner 3. Loosen the screw on the clamp and
element pull the air intake boot out of the air
cleaner case.
Replace the air cleaner element according
WARNING 4. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un- cleaner case (rear).
Do not operate the engine with the der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
air cleaner element removed. The air more frequently. It is recommended that
cleaner element not only filters you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used, 5. Open the air cleaner case and remove
there is the possibility of causing a the air cleaner element.
negative effect to the engine. 6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
1) Connector (both front and rear) with a damp cloth and
The air cleaner element functions as a 2) Clip install a new air cleaner element.
filter screen. When the element is perfo- 3) Clamp 11
rated or removed, engine wear will be 4) Air intake boot
excessive and engine life shortened. 5) Clip
It is not necessary to clean or wash the air 1. Unplug the connector that is attached
cleaner element. to the top of the air cleaner case.
2. Detach the connector cable from the
clip on the right side of the air cleaner
case.
– CONTINUED –
Manual transmission oil Continuously variable trans- Front differential gear oil
mission fluid (CVT models)
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion oil level. Check that there are no It is not necessary to check the transmis- It is not necessary to check the gear oil
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the sion fluid level. Check that there are no level. Check that there are no cracks,
oil inspection should be performed ac- cracks, damage or leakage. However, the damage or leakage. However, the oil
cording to the maintenance schedule in fluid inspection should be performed inspection should be performed according
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. according to the maintenance schedule to the maintenance schedule in the
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
let”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and details.
viscosity & Recommended grade and
Each oil manufacturer has its own base viscosity
oils and additives. Never use different Each oil manufacturer has its own base
brands together. For details, refer to “” oils and additives. Never use different
F12-6. brands together. For details, refer to “”
F12-6.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause
occurrences of rattling noises while
idling and poor fuel consumption.
11
Rear differential gear oil Brake fluid Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
It is not necessary to check the gear oil & Checking the fluid level . Be careful not to spill brake fluid
level. Check that there are no cracks, when adding it. If brake fluid
damage or leakage. However, the oil WARNING touches the exhaust pipe, it may
inspection should be performed according cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
to the maintenance schedule in the . Never let brake fluid contact your a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. eyes because brake fluid can be exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. harmful to your eyes. If brake off.
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
& Recommended grade and clean water. For safety, when
viscosity performing this work, wearing
Each oil manufacturer has its own base eye protection is advisable.
oils and additives. Never use different . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
brands together. For details, refer to “” from the air. Any absorbed moist-
F12-6. ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
CAUTION
. If the vehicle requires frequent
Using a differential gear oil other refilling, there may be a leak. If
than the specified oil may cause you suspect a problem, have the
occurrences of rattling noises while vehicle checked at your SUBARU
idling and poor fuel consumption. dealer.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
CAUTION A) The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
. When adding brake fluid, be care- Check the fluid level monthly.
ful not to allow any dirt into the Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level
. Never splash the brake fluid over for the brake system at the front part of
painted surfaces or rubber parts. the reservoir (shaded area in the illustra-
tion). For MT models, this reservoir is Clutch fluid (MT models) Alcohol contained in the clutch
used for both the brake and clutch fluid may damage them.
systems and has chambers for each & Checking the fluid level . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
system. If the fluid level is below “MIN”, when adding it. If clutch fluid
add the recommended brake fluid to WARNING touches the exhaust pipe, it may
“MAX”. cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
Use only brake fluid from a sealed Never let clutch fluid contact your a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
container. eyes because clutch fluid can be exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid off.
& Recommended brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush
. The fluid level for the clutch
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. them thoroughly with clean water.
system must be checked at the
For safety, when performing this
inboard side of the reservoir. It
CAUTION work, wearing eye protection is
cannot be checked at the out-
advisable.
board side of the reservoir.
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if CAUTION
they are the same brand.
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If 11
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into 1) “MAX” level line
the tank. 2) “MIN” level line
. Never splash the clutch fluid over A) The clutch fluid level must be checked in
painted surfaces or rubber parts. this area.
– CONTINUED –
er. Clutch pedal (MT models) & Checking the clutch pedal
& Checking the brake pedal free play
reserve distance Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
Hill start assist system Replacement of brake pad brake pad wear indicator, it will
and lining result in the need for costly brake
Ensure that the Hill start assist system rotor repair or replacement.
operates properly under the following
circumstances.
& Breaking-in of new brake
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
pads and linings
and clutch pedal (MT models only), with When replacing the brake pad or lining,
the engine running. use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not replacement, the new parts must be
move backward for several seconds after broken in as follows.
the brake pedal is released. ! Brake pad and lining
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
climbing the grade by following the normal mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
starting procedures. pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
If the Hill start assist system does not times.
The disc brakes have audible wear
operate as described above, contact your indicators on the brake pads. If the brake ! Parking brake lining
SUBARU dealer. pads wear close to their service limit, the 1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of
wear indicator makes a very audible approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
scraping noise when the brake pedal is 2. With the parking brake release button
applied. pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
If you hear this scraping noise each time SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as 15.3 kgf]).
soon as possible. 3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
CAUTION 4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
If you continue to drive despite the dure.
scraping noise from the audible
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified Parking brake stroke Tires and wheels
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
located on the parking brake lever. & Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
Parking brake stroke: present on your vehicle.
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf) ! All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
WARNING and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
A safe location and situation should
conditions. However all season tires do
be selected for break-in driving.
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
CAUTION or on icy roads.
Check the parking brake stroke according All season tires are identified by “ALL
Pulling the parking brake lever too to the maintenance schedule in the SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
forcefully may cause the rear “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. the tire sidewall.
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be When the parking brake is properly ! Summer tires
certain to pull the lever up slowly adjusted, braking power is fully applied
and gently. Summer tires are high-speed capability
by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches tires best suited for highway driving under
gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200 dry conditions.
N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever
stroke is not within the specified range, Summer tires are inadequate for driving 11
have the brake system checked and on slippery roads such as on snow-
adjusted at your SUBARU dealer. covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
– CONTINUED –
! Winter (snow) tires temperature outside. By way of example, the tire pressure monitoring system may
Winter tires are best suited for driving on the following table shows the required tire not be functioning normally. In this event,
snow-covered and icy roads. However pressures that correspond to various out- go to a SUBARU dealer to have the
winter tires do not perform as well as side temperatures when the temperature system inspected as soon as possible.
summer tires and all season tires on roads in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
other than snow-covered and icy roads. Example: tween tires and the road surface causes
Ti r e s i z e : P 2 0 5 / 5 5 R 1 6 8 9 V a n d the tires to warm up. After illumination of
& Tire pressure monitoring P205/50R17 88V the low tire pressure warning light, any
system (TPMS) (if equipped) Standard tire pressures: increase in the tire pressures caused by
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) an increase in the outside air temperature
vides the driver with a warning message Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) or by an increase in the temperature in the
by sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) tires can cause the low tire pressure
installed in each wheel when tire pressure warning light to turn off.
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside Adjusted pressure
temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] System resetting is necessary when the
ing system will activate only when the wheels are changed (for example, a
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may Front Rear switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
not react immediately to a sudden drop in 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4) valves are installed on the newly fitted
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out wheels. Have this work performed by a
38 37
caused by running over a sharp object). 108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55) SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm −108F (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7) ment.
garage and will then drive the vehicle in It may not be possible to install TPMS
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire If the low tire pressure warning light valves on certain wheels that are on the
pressures may cause the low tire pressure illuminates when you drive the vehicle in market. Therefore, if you change the
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this cold outside air after adjusting the tire wheels (for example, a switch to snow
problem when adjusting the tire pressures pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tires), use wheels that have the same part
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment
pressures higher than those shown on the above. Then, increase the vehicle speed wheels. Without four operational TPMS
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for see that the low tire pressure warning light will not fully function and the warning light
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire on the combination meter will illuminate
the temperature in the garage and the pressure warning light does not turn off, steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute. a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire rough surface, they can suffer damage
as soon as possible. that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are This type of damage does not become
necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the evident until time has passed. Try not
operation of the tire pressure monitoring to drive over curbs, potholes or on
system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres- other rough surfaces. If doing so is
fore, you should have the work performed unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi- down to a walking pace or less, and
mately one minute. This indicates approach the curbs as squarely as
WARNING
the TPMS is unable to monitor all possible. Also, make sure the tires are
If the low tire pressure warning light four road wheels. Contact your not pressed against the curb when you
does not illuminate briefly after the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible park the vehicle.
ignition switch is turned ON or the for tire and sensor replacement and/ . If you feel unusual vibration while
light illuminates steadily after blink- or system resetting. If the light driving or find it difficult to steer the
ing for approximately one minute, illuminates steadily after blinking vehicle in a straight line, one of the
you should have your Tire Pressure for approximately one minute, tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Monitoring System checked at a promptly contact a SUBARU dealer Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- to have the system inspected. SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
ble. inspected.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep & Tire inspection & Tire pressures and wear
driving straight ahead while gradu- Check on a daily basis that the tires are Maintaining the correct tire pressures
ally reducing speed. Then slowly free from serious damage, nails, and helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
pull off the road to a safe place. stones. At the same time, check the tires and is essential for good running perfor- 11
Otherwise an accident involving for abnormal wear. mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
serious vehicle damage and serious Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- the pressure of each tire (including the
personal injury could occur. ately if you find any problem. spare - if equipped) at least once a month
If this light still illuminates while (for example, during a fuel stop) and
driving after adjusting the tire pres- NOTE before any long journey.
sure, a tire may have significant . When the wheels and tires strike
damage and a fast leak that causes curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
Tire placard in low tire pressure.
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- Roadholding is good, and steering is
the tire pressures to the values shown on trollability and ride comfort, and they responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
the tire placard. The tire placard is located cause the tires to wear abnormally. fuel consumption is also lower.
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread . Abnormally high tire pressure (tread the tires. The resulting loss of
worn at shoulders) worn in center) vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly Example of tire rotation direction mark
and replace the tires before their tread 1) Front
wear indicators become visible.
If the tire has the rotation direction
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
the direction mark facing forward.
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
& Tire rotation Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
maximize the life of each tire and ensure from controllability, ride comfort, braking
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to performance, speedometer accuracy and
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
km). Move the tires to the positions shown rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
in the illustration each time they are priately changes the vehicle’s ground
rotated. clearance.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn All four tires must be the same in terms of
tires at the time of rotation. After tire manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
rotation, adjust the tires pressures and struction, and size. You are advised to
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly replace the tires with new ones that are
tightened. identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
After driving approximately 600 miles
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec- (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
tional tires and retighten any nut that has become recommends replacing all four tires at
1) Front loose. the same time.
– CONTINUED –
& Windshield wiper blade as- & Windshield wiper blade rub-
sembly ber
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Metal spines
with the grooves in the rubber and slide & Rear window wiper blade
the blade rubber assembly into the metal assembly
support until it locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
11
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,
the wiper may scratch the rear window and other metal jewelry. Never
glass. allow metal tools to contact the
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. thing connected to it WHILE you
. Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
lower it in position.
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is . Keep everyone including children
highly flammable and explosive. away from the battery.
. For safety, in case an explosion . Charge the battery in a well-
does occur, wear eye protection ventilated area.
or shield your eyes when work- . Battery posts, terminals and re-
ing near any battery. Never lean lated accessories contain lead
over a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
. Do not let battery fluid contact known to the State of California
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- to cause cancer and reproductive
cause battery fluid is a corrosive harm. Batteries also contain
acid. If battery fluid gets on your other chemicals known to the
skin or in your eyes, immediately State of California to cause can-
flush the area with water thor- cer. Wash hands after handling.
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
Fuses
CAUTION
CAUTION 11
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life. One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
& Rear combination lights panel as illustrated. 6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with
the clips.
! 4-door models NOTE
Make sure that the “*” part of the trunk ! 5-door models
trim in the illustration does not contact
the trunk lid stay. If the “*” part is bent,
the trunk trim may be torn.
2. Slide the rear combination light as- 1) Rear side marker light 1) Guide pins
sembly rearward and remove it from the 2) Rear turn signal light 2) Catch
vehicle. 3) Backup light 3) Clip
4) Stop light/Tail light
6. Put the rear combination light assem-
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear bly into place while aligning the 2 guide
combination light assembly by turning it pins and a catch with the guide holes and
counterclockwise. a clip on the vehicle.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
! 5-door models
– CONTINUED –
& Map light its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
straight downward to remove it.
! Type A 3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
! Type B
& Dome light and cargo area the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. & High-mounted stop light
light 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. (4-door)
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
– CONTINUED –
1) Lens
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
12
12-2 Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
5-door models
Item 4-door models
XV CROSSTREK models SPORT models Other models
Overall length 175.2 (4,450) 173.8 (4,415) 180.3 (4,580)
Overall width 70.1 (1,780) 68.5 (1,740)
Overall height 63.6 (1,615) 59.5 (1,515) 57.7 (1,465)
Wheel base 103.7 (2,635) 104.1 (2,645)
Tread Front 60.0 (1,525) 59.4 (1,510)
Rear 60.0 (1,525) 59.6 (1,515)
Ground clearance* 8.7 (220) 5.9 (150) 5.7 (145)
Specifications/Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model FB20
(2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 121.7 (1,995)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
& Fuel
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Except XV CROSSTREK models 14.5 US gal (55 liters, 12.1 Imp gal)
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
XV CROSSTREK models 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
12
– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications/Specifications
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
Specifications/Specifications 12-5
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
– CONTINUED –
12-6 Specifications/Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil (CVT models) Rear differential gear oil
. SUBARU Extra MT*3
Oil grade . API classification GL-5 API classification GL-5
(75W-90)*4
. 75W/90*
. 90
*: recommended
Oil capacity*1 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt) 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*2 “Manual transmission oil” F11-15 “Front differential gear oil (CVT models)” “Rear differential gear oil” F11-16
F11-15
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of manual transmission oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
Specifications/Specifications 12-7
& Fluids
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer.
fluid (CVT models) 13.1 US qt (12.4 liters, 10.9 Imp qt) “Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid” F11-15
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 – “Brake fluid” F11-16
brake fluid
Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 – “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
brake fluid 17
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-11.
12
& Electrical system
Battery type and capacity (5HR) 55D23L (12V-48AH)
Alternator 12V-110A
Spark plugs SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications/Specifications
& Tires
! U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models
Tire size P195/65R15 89H P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V P225/55R17 95H
Wheel size
15 6 6 J 16 6 6 /2 J
1 17 6 7 JJ*1 17 6 7 J
17 6 7 J*2
Pressure Front CVT models 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
MT models 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear CVT models 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
MT models 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
Temporary Size T135/80 D16 T145/90 D16
spare tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
Wheel nut tightening
torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*3
Specifications/Specifications 12-9
! Other models
12
– CONTINUED –
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
17 Empty
18 Empty
19 15A . Headlight (low beam –
right hand)
20 15A . Headlight (low beam –
left hand)
12
. Bulbs may become very hot while Replace any bulb only with a new
illuminated. Before replacing bulb of the specified wattage. Using
bulbs, turn off the lights and wait a bulb of different wattage could
until the bulbs cool down. Other- result in a fire.
wise, there is a risk of sustaining
a burn injury.
. For models with HID low beam
headlights, observe the following
precautions. Not doing so carries
the risk of an electric shock that
could result in serious injury
because the HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage.
– Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and
high beam) by yourself.
– Do not remove/restore the
headlight assemblies by your-
self.
– Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by
yourself.
12
NOTE
Lights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –
12
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (25,1)
13
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs week, starting with “01” to represent
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 the first full week of the calendar
or otherwise altered from
kg). year; the second two figures repre-
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
WARNING means the 1st week of 2001.
treaded, or otherwise al-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
does not mean the vehicle can speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible infla-
load. tion pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS” 13
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- The vehicle placard is affixed to the
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER” driver’s side B-pillar.
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading Example:
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” F13-15.
WARNING
& Recommended tire inflation
Maximum load rating applies pressure
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire infla-
vehicle. Putting a load rated tion pressure
tire on any vehicle does not For recommended cold tire inflation
mean the vehicle can be pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
loaded up to the tire’s rated refer to “Tires” F12-8.
load. The vehicle placard shows original
! Vehicle placard tire size, recommended cold tire
! Construction type inflation pressure on each tire at
Applicable construction of this tire. maximum loaded vehicle weight,
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL seating capacity and loading infor-
BELTED RADIAL” mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
! Construction of under-inflation
The generic name of each cord Driving at high speeds with exces-
material used in the plies (both sively low tire pressures can cause
sidewall and tread area) of this tire. the tires to flex severely and to
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the . Accessory weight flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
vehicle control could lead to an those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
accident. replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure
pressure to achieve proper in- power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
flation and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
pressure of each tire (including the stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the
before any long journey. Check the . Bead tire.
tire pressures when the tires are The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent
adjust the tire pressures to the by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds.
specific values. Driving even a the rim. . Cracking
short distance warms up the tires . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side-
and increases the tire pressures. A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire
Also, the tire pressures are affected components in the bead. extending to cord material.
by the outside temperature. It is . Bias ply tire . Curb weight
best to check tire pressure out- A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with
doors before driving the vehicle. cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the
When a tire becomes warm, the air laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
inside it expands, causing the tire less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air 13
pressure to increase. Be careful not line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight
to mistakenly release air from a . Carcass optional engine.
warm tire to reduce its pressure. The tire structure, except tread and
– CONTINUED –
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special ignation for a rim by style or code.
vehicles, and trucks, that have a trim. . Rim width
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) . Radial ply tire Nominal distance between rim
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. A pneumatic tire in which the ply flanges.
. Ply cords that extend to the beads are . Section width
A layer of rubber-coated parallel laid at substantially 90 degrees to The linear distance between the
cords. the centerline of the tread. exteriors of the sidewalls of an
. Ply separation . Recommended inflation pres- inflated tire, excluding elevations
A parting of rubber compound sure due to labeling, decoration, or
between adjacent plies. The cold inflation pressure recom- protective bands.
. Pneumatic tire mended by a vehicle manufacturer. . Sidewall
A mechanical device made of rub- . Reinforced tire That portion of a tire between the
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or A tire designed to operate at higher tread and bead.
other materials, that, when loads and at higher inflation pres- . Sidewall separation
mounted on an automotive wheel, sures than the corresponding stan- The parting of the rubber com-
provides the traction and contains dard tire. pound from the cord material in
the gas or fluid that sustains the . Rim the sidewall.
load. A metal support for a tire or a tire . Test rim
. Production options weight and tube assembly upon which the The rim on which a tire is fitted for
The combined weight of those tire beads are seated. testing, and it may be any rim listed
installed regular production options . Rim diameter as appropriate for use with that tire.
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in Nominal diameter of the bead seat. . Tread 13
excess of those standard items . Rim size designation That portion of a tire that comes
which they replace, not previously Rim diameter and width. into contact with the road.
considered in curb weight or acces-
– CONTINUED –
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13
– CONTINUED –
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- can be calculated by the following
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the method.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening
check the tires for abnormal wear. Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer weight of occupants + total weight
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” F9-6.
and replace the tires before their of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
tread wear indicators become visi- & Vehicle load limit – how to
ble. When a tire’s tread wear determine For information about vehicle load-
indicator becomes visible, the tire The load capacity of your vehicle is ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
is worn beyond the acceptable limit determined by weight, not by avail- F8-12.
and must be replaced immediately. able cargo space. The load limit of
With a tire in this condition, driving For information about towing capa-
your vehicle is shown on the city and weight limits, refer to
at even low speeds in wet weather vehicle placard attached to the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- “Trailer towing (XV CROSSTREK
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the models)” F8-18.
plane. Possible resulting loss of statement “The combined weight
vehicle control can lead to an of occupants and cargo should
accident. never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
. To maximize the life of each tire on your vehicle’s placard.
and ensure that the tires wear The vehicle placard also shows
uniformly, it is best to rotate the seating capacity of your vehicle.
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). The total load capacity includes the
For information about the tire rota- total weight of driver and all pas-
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” sengers and their belongings, any
F11-27. Replace any damaged or cargo, any optional equipment such
unevenly worn tires at the time of as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
! Calculating total and load ca- occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) Example 1B
pacities varying seating con- plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
figurations kg).
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
2. Calculate the available load ca- with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity. weight of occupants and cargo pacity.
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
3. The total weight now exceeds 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a
kg), so the cargo weight must be be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
10% of the trailer weight is applied
Example 2A to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
parts of the body. . Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo
Therefore, this means that the and luggage load capacity calcu-
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
vehicle cannot necessarily be rect Load Limit
loaded up to the tire’s maximum 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
load rating on the tire sidewall. 1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult
& Adverse safety conse- cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this
quences of overloading on kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and
handling and stopping and placard. luggage load capacity of your ve-
on tires 2. Determine the combined weight hicle.
Overloading could affect vehicle of the driver and passengers that
handling, stopping distance, and will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle and tire performance in the 3. Subtract the combined weight of
following ways. This could lead to the driver and passengers from
an accident and possibly result in XXX kg or XXX lbs.
severe personal injury. 4. The resulting figure equals the
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate. available amount of cargo and
. Heavy and/or high-mounted luggage load capacity. For exam-
loads could increase the risk of ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
rollover. 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
. Stopping distance will increase. lb passengers in your vehicle, the
. Brakes could overheat and fail. amount of available cargo and
. Suspension, bearings, axles and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
other body parts could break or (1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)
experience accelerated wear that 5. Determine the combined weight
will shorten vehicle life. of luggage and cargo being loaded
. Tires could fail. on the vehicle. That weight may not
. Tread separation could occur.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-15
Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of
standards ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear mance.
tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to
tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight-
in making an informed choice in the government test course. ahead braking traction tests,
purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel-
Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan-
applicable on the tire sidewall be- 1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac-
tween tread shoulder and maxi- ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics.
mum section width. For example: The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C
perature A
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the
The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the
pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of
ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat
apply to deep tread, winter type when tested under controlled con-
snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material 13
or less, or to some limited produc- grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature
under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The
All passenger car tires must con-
– CONTINUED –
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
grade C corresponds to a level of Reporting safety defects New Jersey Avenue, SE, West
performance which all passenger (U.S.A.) Building, Washington, DC 20590.
car tires must meet under the You can also obtain other informa-
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- If you believe that your vehicle has tion about motor vehicle safety
dards No. 109. Grades B and A a defect which could cause a from http://www.safercar.gov.
represent higher levels of perfor- crash or could cause injury or
mance on the laboratory test wheel death, you should immediately in-
than the minimum required by law. form the National Highway Traffic
WARNING Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
The temperature grade for this America, Inc.
tire is established for a tire If NHTSA receives similar com-
that is properly inflated and plaints, it may open an investiga-
not overloaded. Excessive tion, and if it finds that a safety
speed, underinflation, or ex- defect exists in a group of vehi-
cessive loading, either sepa- cles, it may order a recall and
rately or in combination, can remedy campaign. However,
cause heat buildup and possi- NHTSA cannot become involved
ble tire failure. in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
Supplement
& Declaration of conformity with FCC rules
! Electrostatic sensor for occupant detection system
13
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (27,1)
Index
14
14-2 Index
Index 14-3
Tips...................................................................... 7-26 Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-24
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-20 Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-31
Bulb Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-27
Chart .................................................................. 12-14 Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-32
Replacing............................................................. 11-37 Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-35
Child safety ................................................................... 4
C Locks.................................................................... 2-15
Cargo area Chime
Cover ................................................................... 6-11 Key........................................................................ 3-4
Light............................................................. 6-2, 11-43 Light ..................................................................... 3-71
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-13 Seatbelt.................................................................. 3-9
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Cigarette lighter........................................................... 6-8
Center Cleaning
Console .................................................................. 6-5 Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Changing Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Coolant................................................................ 11-12 Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-11
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6 Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9 Automatic ............................................................... 4-7
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-14 Manual................................................................... 4-8
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Clock ....................................................... 3-27, 3-40, 3-54
light....................................................................... 3-12 Clutch
Checking Fluid ................................................................... 11-17
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-18 Pedal .................................................................. 11-19
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-19 Coat hook.................................................................. 6-10
Clutch function...................................................... 11-19 Compass........................................................... 3-79, 3-80
Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-19 Console ..................................................................... 6-5
Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11 Continuously variable transmission
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-16 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-15
Fluid level (clutch fluid) .......................................... 11-17 Continuously variable transmission (CVT)...................... 7-19
Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-29 Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7
Oil level (engine oil) ............................................... 11-8 Coolant ........................................................... 11-11, 12-7
14-4 Index
Index 14-5
Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-15 Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-5, 9-2
Fog light Head restraint adjustment
Bulb .......................................................... 11-38, 12-14 Front seat............................................................... 1-5
Indicator light......................................................... 3-22 Rear seat ............................................................... 1-8
Switch .................................................................. 3-75 Headlight
Folding mirror switch .................................................. 3-87 Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-74
Front Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-37
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-15, 12-6 Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-14
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20 Control switch ........................................................ 3-71
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-38 Flasher.................................................................. 3-72
Front seats.................................................................. 1-2 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22
Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-3 HID headlights ...................................................... 1, 11-37
Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-5 High beam indicator light ............................................. 3-22
Reclining................................................................. 1-4 High-mounted stop light............................................. 11-43
Seat cushion height adjustment ................................. 1-4 High/low beam change (dimmer) .................................. 3-72
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 Hill start assist ................................................. 7-36, 11-20
Consumption indicator .................................... 3-23, 3-33 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-18
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 Warning light.......................................................... 3-18
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4 HomeLink® ................................................................. 3-80
Gauge .................................................................... 3-8 Hook
Requirements .................................................. 7-3, 12-3 Cargo tie-down....................................................... 6-13
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-35 Coat ..................................................................... 6-10
Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10 Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-11
Towing and tie-down ............................................... 9-14
G Horn ......................................................................... 3-90
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13 Hose and connections............................................... 11-11
Glove box ................................................................... 6-5
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13 I
Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-3
H Light ...................................................................... 3-5
Hands-free system ..................................................... 5-34 Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-74
14-6 Index
Index 14-7
M Outside
Maintenance Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-88
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3 Mirrors .................................................................. 3-86
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3 Temperature indicator...................................... 3-23, 3-32
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-19 Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13
Tools ...................................................................... 9-3
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ... 3-12 P
Manual Parking
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................ 7-21 Brake.................................................................... 7-34
Transmission ......................................................... 7-17 Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-21
Transmission oil.................................................... 11-15 Light ................................................................... 11-38
Map light........................................................... 6-3, 11-42 Tips ...................................................................... 7-34
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-18 Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-5 Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3
Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-88 Power
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-79 Door locking switch.................................................. 2-6
Moonroof .................................................................. 2-23 Outlets ................................................................... 6-7
Multi function display .................................................. 3-28 Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-86
Steering ................................................................ 7-25
N Steering warning light.............................................. 3-19
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2 Windows ............................................................... 2-16
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-24, 1-66
O Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Odometer.................................................................... 3-6
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6 R
Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9 Rear
Oil level Combination lights ................................................ 11-39
Engine.................................................................. 11-8 Differential gear oil........................................ 11-16, 12-6
Warning light ......................................................... 3-14 Gate ............................................................. 2-21, 9-18
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-14 Turn signal light.................................................... 11-39
Rear seat ................................................................... 1-7
14-8 Index
Index 14-9
Safety tips............................................................. 1-11 Power ................................................................... 7-25
Warning light and chime ........................................... 3-9 Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-89
Security Stop light................................................................. 11-39
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-10 Storage compartment................................................... 6-4
Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-2 Sun shade................................................................. 2-24
Indicator light......................................................... 3-21 Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4
Shock sensors....................................................... 2-15 Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-37
Select lever Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5
Position indicator ................................................... 3-21
Shift lock function................................................... 7-23 T
Shock sensors........................................................... 2-15 Tachometer................................................................. 3-7
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-11 Temperature warning light
Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-20 AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-15
Snow tires........................................................ 8-10, 11-22 Coolant ................................................................. 3-13
Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-9 Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Sounding a panic alarm ................................................ 2-9 Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-32, 1-35
Spark plugs...................................................... 11-14, 12-7 Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-14
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2 Tire................................................................. 11-21, 12-8
Speedometer............................................................... 3-6 Chains .................................................................. 8-11
SRS Inspection............................................................ 11-23
Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-55 Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-23
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-46 Replacement........................................................ 11-27
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-55 Rotation .............................................................. 11-27
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-37 Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8
SRS airbag system Types.................................................................. 11-21
Monitors................................................................ 1-64 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-32, 9-9, 11-22
Servicing............................................................... 1-65 Warning light.......................................................... 3-15
Warning light ......................................................... 3-11 Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-21
Starting & stopping engine ............................................ 7-9 Tools.......................................................................... 9-3
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7 Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-32, 1-35
Steering wheel Towing ...................................................................... 9-14
14-10 Index
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17 Operation indicator light........................................... 3-19
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16 System.................................................................. 7-29
Hooks................................................................... 9-14 Warning light.......................................................... 3-19
Weight.................................................................. 8-18 Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
Trailer
Connecting............................................................ 8-17 W
Hitch ............................................................ 8-16, 8-22 Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9
Towing.................................................................. 8-18 Warning chimes
Towing tips............................................................ 8-24 Seatbelt.................................................................. 3-9
Trip meter ................................................................... 3-7 Warning light
Trunk lid ................................................................... 2-19 ABS...................................................................... 3-16
Release handle ..................................................... 2-20 All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-18
Trunk light................................................................ 11-43 AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-15
Turn signal Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. 3-22
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-22 Brake system......................................................... 3-17
Lever.................................................................... 3-73 Charge.................................................................. 3-14
CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-12
U Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-13
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-13 Door open ............................................................. 3-18
USB storage device operations.................................... 5-24 Engine low oil level................................................. 3-14
Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-18
V Low fuel ................................................................ 3-18
Valet mode................................................................ 2-13 Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-15
Vanity mirror ................................................................ 6-4 Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-14
Vehicle Power steering ....................................................... 3-19
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-12 Seatbelt.................................................................. 3-9
Identification ........................................................ 12-17 SRS airbag system................................................. 3-11
Symbols .................................................................... 3 Vehicle Dynamics Control ........................................ 3-19
Vehicle Dynamics Control Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-14
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-20 Warranties ..................................................................... 1
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-31 Warranties and maintenance........................................ 8-18
Index 14-11
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-26
Wheel
Aluminum............................................................. 11-28
Balance ............................................................... 11-25
Nut tightening torque .............................................. 12-8
Replacement ........................................................ 11-28
Windows................................................................... 2-16
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-29
Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-77
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-31
Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-88
Winter
Driving.................................................................... 8-8
Tires............................................................ 8-10, 11-22
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-75
Wiper deicer.............................................................. 3-88
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (2,1)